diff options
Diffstat (limited to '42398-8.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 42398-8.txt | 6942 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 6942 deletions
diff --git a/42398-8.txt b/42398-8.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7b56659..0000000 --- a/42398-8.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,6942 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Historic Adventures, by Rupert S. Holland - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org - - -Title: Historic Adventures - Tales from American History - -Author: Rupert S. Holland - -Release Date: March 24, 2013 [EBook #42398] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORIC ADVENTURES *** - - - - -Produced by Greg Bergquist, Charlie Howard, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This -file was produced from images generously made available -by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) - - - - - - - -[Illustration: SHOOTING TONGUES OF SMOKE FROM THEIR GREAT BLACK THROATS] - - - - - Historic Adventures - - _Tales from American History_ - - By - RUPERT S. HOLLAND - - _Author of "Historic Boyhoods," "Historic Girlhoods," - "Historic Inventions," etc._ - - [Illustration] - - PHILADELPHIA - GEORGE W. JACOBS & COMPANY - PUBLISHERS - - - - - Copyright, 1913, by - GEORGE W. JACOBS & COMPANY - _Published October, 1913_ - - _All rights reserved_ - Printed in U.S.A. - - - - - _To - Robert D. Jenks_ - - - - -Contents - - - I. THE LOST CHILDREN 9 - - II. THE GREAT JOURNEY OF LEWIS AND CLARK 21 - - III. THE CONSPIRACY OF AARON BURR 59 - - IV. HOW THE YOUNG REPUBLIC FOUGHT THE BARBARY PIRATES 80 - - V. THE FATE OF LOVEJOY'S PRINTING-PRESS 113 - - VI. HOW MARCUS WHITMAN SAVED OREGON 135 - - VII. HOW THE MORMONS CAME TO SETTLE UTAH 165 - - VIII. THE GOLDEN DAYS OF 'FORTY-NINE 181 - - IX. HOW THE UNITED STATES MADE FRIENDS WITH JAPAN 203 - - X. THE PIG THAT ALMOST CAUSED A WAR 222 - - XI. JOHN BROWN AT HARPER'S FERRY 229 - - XII. AN ARCTIC EXPLORER 254 - - XIII. THE STORY OF ALASKA 264 - - XIV. HOW THE "MERRIMAC" WAS SUNK IN SANTIAGO HARBOR 275 - - - - -Illustrations - - - Shooting tongues of smoke from their great black - throats _Frontispiece_ - - _Facing page_ - Sawquehanna seemed to remember the voice 18 - - Decatur caught the Moor's arm 90 - - The last six hundred miles were the hardest 152 - - Nauvoo had handsome houses and public buildings 166 - - Wherever there was a stream explorers began to dig 186 - - The teams, exhausted, began to fail 200 - - Spanish boats pulled close to them 282 - - - - -I - -THE LOST CHILDREN - - -The valleys of Pennsylvania were dotted with log cabins in the days of -the French and Indian wars. Sometimes a number of the little houses -stood close together for protection, but often they were built far -apart. Wherever the pioneer saw good farm land he settled. It was a new -sensation for men to be able to go into the country and take whatever -land attracted them. Gentle rolling fields, with wide views of distant -country through the notches of the hills, shining rivers, splendid uncut -forests, and rich pasturage were to be found not far from the growing -village of Philadelphia, and were free to any who wished to take them. -Such a land would have been a paradise, but for one shadow that hung -over it. In the background always lurked the Indians, who might at any -time, without rhyme or reason, steal down upon the lonely hamlet or -cabin, and lay it waste. The pioneer looked across the broad acres of -central Pennsylvania and found them beautiful. Only when he had built -his home and planted his fields did he fully realize the constant peril -that lurked in the wooded mountains. - -English, French, and Spanish came to the new world, and the English -proved themselves the best colonists. They settled the central part -of the Atlantic Coast, but among them and mixed with them were people -of other lands. The Dutch took a liking for the Island of Manhattan -and the Hudson River, the Swedes for Delaware, and into the colony of -William Penn came pilgrims from what was called the Palatinate, Germans, -a strong race drawn partly by desire for religious freedom, partly by -the reports of the great free lands across the ocean. They brought with -them the tongue, the customs, and the names of the German Fatherland, -and many a valley of eastern Pennsylvania heard only the German language -spoken. - -The Indian tribes known as the Six Nations roamed through the country -watered by the Susquehanna. They hunted through all the land south of -the Great Lakes. Sometimes they fought with the Delawares, sometimes -with the Catawbas, and again they would smoke the calumet or pipe of -peace with their neighbors, and give up the war-path for months at a -time. But the settlers could never be sure of their intentions. Wily -French agents might sow seeds of discord in the Indians' minds, and -then the chiefs who had lately exchanged gifts with the settlers might -suddenly steal upon some quiet village and leave the place in ruins. -This constant peril was the price men had to pay in return for the right -to take whatever land they liked. - -In a little valley of eastern Pennsylvania a German settler named John -Hartman had built a cabin in 1754. He had come to this place with his -wife and four children because here he might earn a good living from the -land. He was a hard worker, and his farm was prospering. He had horses -and cattle, and his wife spun and wove the clothing for the family. The -four children, George, Barbara, Regina, and Christian, looked upon the -valley as their home, forgetting the German village over the sea. Not -far away lived neighbors, and sometimes the children went to play with -other boys and girls, and sometimes their friends spent a holiday on -John Hartman's farm. - -The family, like all farmers' families, rose early. Before they began -the day's work the father would read to them from his big Bible, which -he had brought from his native land as his most valuable possession. On -a bright morning in the autumn of 1754 he gathered his family in the -living-room of his cabin and read them a Bible lesson. The doors and -windows stood open, and the sun flooded the little house, built of rough -boards, and scrupulously clean. The farmer's dog, Wasser, lay curled -up asleep just outside the front door, and a pair of horses, already -harnessed, stood waiting to be driven to the field. Birds singing in -the trees called to the children to hurry out-of-doors. They tried to -listen to their father's voice as he read, and to pay attention. As they -all knelt he prayed for their safety. Then they had breakfast, and the -father and mother made plans for the day. Mrs. Hartman was to take the -younger boy, Christian, to the flour-mill several miles away, and if -they had time was to call at the cabin of a sick friend. The father and -George went to the field to finish their sowing before the autumn rains -should come, and the two little girls were told to look after the house -till their mother should return. Little Christian sat upon an old horse, -held on by his mother, and waved his hand to his father and George as he -rode by the field on his way to the mill. - -The girls, like their mother, were good housekeepers. They set the table -for dinner, and at noon Barbara blew the big tin horn to call her father -and brother. As they were eating dinner the dog Wasser came running into -the house growling, and acting as if he were very much frightened. Mr. -Hartman spoke to him, and called him to his side. But the dog stood in -the doorway, and then suddenly leaped forward and sprang upon an Indian -who came around the wall. - -The peril that lurked in the woods had come. John Hartman jumped to the -door, but two rifle bullets struck him down. George sprang up, only to -fall beside his father. An Indian killed the dog with his tomahawk. -Into the peaceful cabin swarmed fifteen yelling savages. Barbara ran up -a ladder into the loft, and Regina fell on her knees, murmuring "Herr -Jesus! Herr Jesus!" The Indians hesitated, then one of them seized her, -and made a motion with his knife across her lips to bid her be silent. -Another went after Barbara and brought her down from the loft, and then -the Indians ordered the two girls to put on the table all the food there -was in the cabin. - -When the food was gone the savages plundered the house, making bundles -of what they wanted and slinging them over their shoulders. They took -the two little girls into the field. There another girl stood tied to -the fence. When she saw Barbara and Regina she began to cry, and called -in German for her mother. While the three frightened girls stood close -together the Indians set fire to the cabin. Very soon the log house that -had cost John Hartman so much labor was burned to the ground. When their -work of destruction was completed the Indians took the three children -into the woods. - -At sunset Mrs. Hartman returned from the flour-mill with little -Christian riding his horse, but when she came up the road it seemed as -if her house had disappeared. Yet the pine trees, the fences, the plowed -fields, and the orchard were still there. The little boy cried, "Where -is our house, mother?" and the poor woman could not understand. - -The story of what had occurred was only too plain to her a few minutes -later. What had happened to many other pioneers had happened to her -family. Clutching Christian in her arms she ran to the house of her -nearest neighbor. There she heard that the Indians had left the same -track of blood through other parts of the valley; that farmers had -been slain; their crops burned; and their children carried off into the -wilderness. The terrified settlers banded together for protection. For -weeks new stories came of the Indians' massacres. If ever there were -heartless savages these were! They did not carry all the children to -their wigwams; some were killed on the way; and among them was little -Barbara Hartman. Word came from time to time of some of the stolen -children, but there was no word of Regina or Susan Smith, the daughter -of the neighboring farmer. - - * * * * * - -Far in the forests of western New York was the camp of a great Indian -tribe. The wigwams stood on the banks of a beautiful mountain stream, -broken by great rocks that sent the water leaping in cascades and -falls. In one of the wigwams lived the mother of a famous warrior -of the tribe, and with her were two girls whom she treated as her -daughters. The name of the old squaw was She-lack-la, which meant "the -Dark and Rainy Cloud," a name given her because at times she grew very -angry and ill-treated every one around her. Fortunately there were two -girls in her wigwam, and when the old squaw was in a bad temper they -had each other for protection. The older girl had been given the name -of Saw-que-han-na, or "the White Lily," and the other was known as -Kno-los-ka, "the Short-legged Bear." Like all the Indian girls they had -to work hard, grinding corn, cooking and keeping house for the boys -and men who were brought up to hunt and fight. Sawquehanna was tall and -strong, spoke the language of the tribe, and looked very much like her -Indian girl friends. - -In the meantime many battles had been fought through the country of -the pioneers, and the English colonists were beating the French and -Indians, and driving the Frenchmen farther and farther north. In 1765 -the long war between the two nations ended. Under a treaty of peace the -English Colonel Boquet demanded that all the white children who had -been captured by the Indian tribes should be surrendered to the English -officers. So one day white soldiers came into the woods of western New -York and found the wigwams there. The children were called out, and the -soldiers took the two girls from the old squaw Shelackla. Then they -went on to the other tribes, and from each they took all the white -children. They carried them to Fort Duquesne. The Fort was in western -Pennsylvania, and as soon as it was known that the lost white children -were there, fathers and mothers all over the country hurried to find -their boys and girls. Many of the children had been away so long that -they hardly remembered their parents, but most of the parents knew their -children, and found them again within the walls of the fortress. - -Some of the children, however, were not claimed. Sawquehanna and her -friend Knoloska and nearly fifty more found no one looking for them -and wondered what would happen to them. After they had waited at Fort -Duquesne eight days, Colonel Boquet started to march with his band -of children to the town of Carlisle, in hopes that they might find -friends farther east, or at least kind-hearted people who would give the -children homes. He sent news of their march all through the country, and -from day to day as they traveled through the mountains by way of Fort -Ligonier, Raystown, and Louden, eager people arrived to search among the -band of children for lost sons and daughters. When the children came to -Carlisle the town was filled with settlers from the East. - -The children stood in the market-place, and the men and women pressed -about them, trying to recognize little ones who had been carried away by -Indians years before. Some people who lived in the Blue Mountains were -in the throng, and they recognized the dark-haired Indian girl Knoloska -as Susan, the daughter of Mr. Smith, the farmer who had lived near the -Hartmans. Knoloska and Sawquehanna had not been separated for a long -time. They had kept together ever since the white soldiers had freed -them from the old squaw's wigwam. Sawquehanna could not bear to think of -having her comrade leave her, and Susan clung to her adopted sister's -arm and kissed her again and again. The white people were much kinder -than the old squaw had been, and instead of beating the girls when they -cried, and frightening them with threats, the officers told Sawquehanna -that she would probably find some friends soon, and if she did not, that -perhaps Susan's family would let her live in their home. But as nobody -seemed to recognize her Sawquehanna felt more lonely than she had ever -felt before. - -Meanwhile Mrs. Hartman was living in the valley with her son Christian, -who had grown to be a strong boy of fourteen. Neighbors told her that -the lost children were being brought across the mountains to Carlisle, -but there seemed little chance that her own Regina might be one of them. -She decided, however, that she must go to the town and see. Travel -was difficult in those days, but the brave woman set out over the -mountains and across the rivers to Carlisle, and at last reached the -town market-place. She looked anxiously among the girls, remembering -her little daughter as she had been on that autumn day eleven years -before; but none of the girls had the blue eyes, light yellow hair and -red cheeks of Regina. Mrs. Hartman shook her head, and decided that her -daughter was not among these children. - -As she turned away, disconsolate, Colonel Boquet said to her, "Can't you -find your daughter?" - -"No," said the disappointed mother, "my daughter is not among those -children." - -"Are you sure?" asked the colonel. "Are there no marks by which you -might know her?" - -"None, sir," she answered, shaking her head. - -Colonel Boquet considered the matter for a few minutes. "Did you ever -sing to her?" he asked presently. "Was there no old hymn that she was -fond of?" - -The mother looked up quickly. "Yes, there was!" she answered. "I have -often sung her to sleep in my arms with an old German hymn we all loved -so well." - -"Then," said the colonel, "you and I will walk along the line of girls -and you shall sing that hymn. It may be that your daughter has changed -so much that you wouldn't know her, but she may remember the tune." - -Mrs. Hartman looked very doubtful. "There is little use in it, sir," she -said, "for certainly I should have known her if she were here; and if -I try your plan all these soldiers will laugh at me for a foolish old -German woman." - -[Illustration: SAWQUEHANNA SEEMED TO REMEMBER THE VOICE] - -The colonel, however, begged her at least to try his plan, and she -finally consented. They walked back to the place where the children were -standing, and Mrs. Hartman began to sing in a trembling voice the first -words of the old hymn: - - "Alone, and yet not all alone, am I - In this lone wilderness." - -As she went on singing every one stopped talking and turned to look at -her. The woman's hands were clasped as if in prayer, and her eyes -were closed. The sun shone full upon her white hair and upturned face. -There was something very beautiful in the picture she made, and there -was silence in the market-place as her gentle voice went on through the -words of the hymn. - -The mother had begun the second verse when one of the children gave a -cry. It was Sawquehanna, who seemed suddenly to have remembered the -voice and words. She rushed forward, and flung her arms about the -mother's neck, crying, "Mother, mother!" Then, with her arms tight about -her, the tall girl joined in singing the words that had lulled her to -sleep in their cabin home. - - "Alone, and yet not all alone, am I - In this lone wilderness, - I feel my Saviour always nigh; - He comes the weary hours to bless. - I am with Him, and He with me, - E'en here alone I cannot be." - -The people in the market-place moved on about their own affairs, and the -mother and daughter were left together. Now Mrs. Hartman recognized the -blue eyes of Regina, and knew her daughter in spite of her height and -dark skin. Regina began to remember the days of her childhood, and the -years she had spent among the Indians were forgotten. She was a white -girl again, and happier now than she had ever thought to be. - -Next day Knoloska, now Susan Smith, and Sawquehanna, or Regina Hartman, -went back to their homes in the valley. Many a settler there had found -his son or daughter in the crowd of lost children at Carlisle. - - - - -II - -THE GREAT JOURNEY OF LEWIS AND CLARK - - -French is still spoken in Quebec and New Orleans, reminders that the -land of the lilies had much to do with the settlement of North America. -Many of the greatest explorers of the continent were Frenchmen. Jacques -Cartier sailed up the St. Lawrence River in 1534, and Champlain in 1603 -founded New France, and from his small fortress at Quebec planned an -empire that should reach to Florida. In 1666 Robert Cavalier, the Sieur -de La Salle, came to Canada, and set out from his _seigneurie_ near the -rapids of Montreal to find the long-sought road to China. Instead of -doing that he discovered the Ohio River, first of white men he voyaged -across the Great Lakes and sailed down the Mississippi to its mouth. -Great explorer, he mapped the country from the St. Lawrence to the -Gulf of Mexico, from the Mississippi to the Atlantic Ocean, and built -frontier-posts in the wilderness. He traveled thousands of miles, and in -1682 he raised the lilies of France near the mouth of the Mississippi -and named the whole territory he had covered _Louisiana_, in honor of -King Louis XIV of France. - -The first colony on the Gulf was established seventeen years later at -Biloxi by a Canadian _seigneur_ named Iberville. Soon afterward this -_seigneur's_ brother, Bienville, founded New Orleans and attracted -many French pioneers there. The French proved to be better explorers -than farmers or settlers. In the south they hunted the sources of the -Arkansas and Red Rivers, and discovered the little-known Pawnee and -Comanche Indians. In the north they pressed westward and came in sight -of the Rocky Mountains. At that time it seemed as if France was to own -at least two-thirds of the continent. The English general, Braddock, -was defeated at Fort Duquesne in 1755, and the French commanded the -Ohio as well as the Mississippi; but four years later the English -general, Wolfe, won the victory of the Plains of Abraham near Quebec; -and France's chance was over. Men in Paris who knew little concerning -the new world did not scruple to give away their country's title to -vast lands. The French ceded Canada and all of La Salle's old province -of Louisiana east of the Mississippi, except New Orleans, to England. -Soon afterward France, to outwit England, gave Spain New Orleans and her -claim to the half of the Mississippi Valley west of the river to which -the name Louisiana now came to be restricted. - -The French, however, were great adventurers by nature, and Napoleon, -changing the map of Europe, could not keep his fingers from North -America. He planned to win back the New France that had been given -away. Spain was weak, and Napoleon traded a small province in Italy for -the great tract of Louisiana. He meant to colonize and fortify this -splendid empire, but before it could be done enemies gathered against -his eagles at home, and to save his European throne he had to forsake -his western colony. - -When Thomas Jefferson became President in 1801, he found the people of -the South and West disturbed at France's repossessing herself of so much -territory. He sent Robert R. Livingston and James Monroe to Paris to try -to buy New Orleans and the country known as the Floridas for $2,000,000. -Instead Napoleon offered to sell not only New Orleans, but the whole -of Louisiana Territory extending as far west as the Rocky Mountains -for $15,000,000. Napoleon insisted on the sale, and the envoys agreed. -Jefferson and the people in the eastern United States were dismayed at -the price paid for what they considered almost worthless land, but the -West was delighted, owning the mouth of the great Mississippi and with -the country beyond it free to them to explore. In time this purchase of -Louisiana, or the territory stretching to the Rocky Mountains, forming -the larger part of what are now thirteen of the states of the Union, -was to be considered one of the greatest pieces of good fortune in the -country's history. - -Scarcely anything was known of Louisiana, except the stories told by -a few hunters. Jefferson decided that the region must be explored, -and asked his young secretary, Meriwether Lewis, who had shown great -interest in the new country, to make a path through the wilderness. -Lewis chose his friend William Clark to accompany him, and picked -thirty-two experienced men for their party. May 14, 1804, the expedition -set out in a barge with sails and two smaller boats from a point on the -Missouri River near St. Louis. - -The nearer part of this country had already been well explored by -hunters and trappers, and especially by that race of adventurous -Frenchmen who were rovers by nature. These men could not endure -the confining life of towns, and were continually pushing into the -wilderness, driving their light canoes over the waters of the great -rivers, and often sharing the tents of friendly Indians they met. Many -had become almost more Indian than white man,--had married Indian -wives and lived the wandering life of the native. Such a man Captain -Lewis found at the start of his journey, and took with him to act as -interpreter among the Sioux and tribes who spoke a similar language. - -The party traveled rapidly at the outset of their journey, meeting small -bands of Indians, and passing one or two widely-separated frontier -settlements. They had to pass many difficult rapids in the river, but as -they were for the most part expert boatmen they met with no mishaps. The -last white town on the Missouri was a little hamlet called La Charrette, -consisting of seven houses, with as many families located there to hunt -and trade for skins and furs. As they went up the river they frequently -met canoes loaded with furs coming down. Day by day they took careful -observations, and made maps of the country through which they were -traveling, and when they met Indians tried to learn the history and -customs of the tribe. Captain Lewis wrote down many of their curious -traditions. The Osage tribe had given their name to a river that flowed -into the Missouri a little more than a hundred miles from its mouth. -There were three tribes of this nation: the Great Osages, numbering -about five hundred warriors; the Little Osages, who lived some six miles -distant from the others, and numbered half as many men; and the Arkansas -band, six hundred strong, who had left the others some time before, and -settled on the Vermillion River. The Osages lived in villages and were -good farmers, usually peaceful, although naturally strong and tireless. -Captain Lewis found a curious tradition as to the origin of their tribe. -The story was that the founder of the nation was a snail, who lived -quietly on the banks of the Osage until a high flood swept him down to -the Missouri, and left him exposed on the shore. The heat of the sun -at length ripened him into a man, but with the change in his nature he -did not forget his native haunts on the Osage, but immediately bent -his way in that direction. He was, however, soon overtaken by hunger -and fatigue, when happily the Great Spirit appeared, and giving him a -bow and arrow showed him how to kill and cook deer, and cover himself -with the skins. He then pushed on to his home, but as he neared it he -was met by a beaver, who inquired haughtily who he was, and by what -authority he came to disturb his possession. The Osage answered that the -river was his own, for he had once lived on its borders. As they stood -disputing, the daughter of the beaver came, and having by her entreaties -made peace between her father and the young stranger, it was proposed -that the Osage should marry the young beaver, and share the banks of -the river with her family. The Osage readily consented, and from this -happy marriage there came the village and the nation of the Wasbasha, -or Osages, who kept a reverence for their ancestors, never hunting the -beaver, because in killing that animal they would kill a brother of the -Osage. The explorers found, however, that since the value of beaver -skins had risen in trade with the white men, these Indians were not so -particular in their reverence for their relatives. - -The mouth of the Platte River was reached on July 21st, and the next day -Lewis held a council with the Ottoes and Missouri Indians, and named the -site Council Bluffs. At each of these meetings between Lewis and the -Indians the white man would explain that this territory was now part -of the United States, would urge the tribes to trade with their new -neighbors, and then present them with gifts of medals, necklaces, rings, -tobacco, ornaments of all sorts, and often powder and arms. - -The Indians were friendly and each day taught the white men something -new. Both Captain Lewis and Lieutenant Clark had seen much of the red -men on the frontier, but now they were in a land where they found them -in their own homes. They grew accustomed to the round tepees decorated -with bright-colored skins, the necklaces made of claws of grizzly bears, -the head-dresses of eagle feathers, the tambourines, or small drums that -furnished most of their music, the whip-rattles made of the hoofs of -goats and deer, the white-dressed buffalo robes painted with pictures -that told the history of the tribe, the moccasins and tobacco pouches -embroidered with many colored beads. Each tribe differed in some way -from its neighbors. For the first time the explorers found among the -Rickarees eight-sided earth-covered lodges, and basket-shaped boats made -of interwoven boughs covered with buffalo skins. - -Game was plentiful as they went farther up the Missouri River. At -first no buffaloes were found, but bands of elk were seen, and large -herds of goats crossing from their summer grazing grounds in the hilly -region west of the Missouri to their winter quarters. Besides these -were antelopes, beavers, bears, badgers, deer, and porcupines, and the -river banks supplied them with plover, grouse, geese, turkeys, ducks, -and pelicans. There were plenty of wild fruits to be had, and they lived -well during the whole of the summer. They traveled rapidly until the -approach of cold weather decided them to establish winter quarters on -October 27th. - -They pitched their camp, which they called Fort Mandan, on the eastern -shore of the Missouri, near the present city of Bismarck. They built -some wooden huts, which formed two sides of a triangle, and a row of -pickets on the third side, to provide them with a stockade in case of -attack. They found a trader of the Hudson's Bay Company near by, and -during the winter a dozen other traders visited them. Although they -appeared to be friendly, Captain Lewis was convinced that the traders -had no desire to see this United States expedition push into the -country, and would in fact do all they could to prevent its advance. -The Indians in the neighborhood belonged to the tribes of the Mandans, -Rickarees, and Minnetarees. The first two of these tribes went to war -early in the winter, but peace was made through the efforts of Captain -Lewis. After that all the Indians visited the encampment, bringing -stores of corn and presents of different sorts, in exchange for which -they obtained beads, rings, and cloth from the white men. Here Captain -Lewis learned a curious legend of the Mandan tribe. They believed that -all their nation originally lived in one large village underground -near a subterranean lake, and that a grape-vine stretched its roots -down to their home and gave them a view of daylight. Some of the more -adventurous of the tribe climbed up the vine, and were delighted with -the sight of the earth, which they found covered with buffaloes and -rich with all kinds of fruits. They gathered some grapes and returned -with them to their countrymen, and told them of the charms of the land -they had seen. The others were very much pleased with the story and with -the grapes, and men, women and children started to climb up the vine. -But when only half of them had reached the top a heavy woman broke the -vine by her weight, and so closed the road to the rest of the nation. -Each member of this tribe was accustomed to select a particular object -for his devotion, and call it his "medicine." To this they would offer -sacrifices of every kind. One of the Indians said to Captain Lewis, "I -was lately the owner of seventeen horses; but I have offered them all -up to my 'medicine,' and am now poor." He had actually loosed all his -seventeen horses on the plains, thinking that in that way he was doing -honor to his god. - -Almost every day hunting parties left the camp and brought back -buffaloes. The weather grew very cold in December, and several times -the thermometer fell to forty degrees below zero. As spring advanced, -however, the weather became very mild, and as early as April 7, 1805, -they were able to leave their camp at Fort Manden and start on again. -The upper Missouri they found was too shallow for the large barge they -had used the previous summer, so this was now sent back down the river -in charge of a party of ten men who carried letters and specimens, -while the others embarked in six canoes and two large open boats that -they had built during the winter. So far the country through which they -had passed had been explored by a few Hudson's Bay trappers, but as they -now turned westward they came into a region entirely unknown, which they -soon found was almost uninhabited. - -The party had by this time three interpreters, one a Canadian half-breed -named Drewyer, who had inherited from his mother the Indian's skill in -woodcraft, and who also knew the language of the white explorers. The -other two were a man named Chaboneau and his wife, a young squaw called -Sacajawea, the "Bird-woman," who had originally belonged to the Snake -tribe, but who had been captured in her childhood by Blackfeet Indians. -This Indian girl had married Chaboneau, a French wanderer, who like -many others of his kind had sunk into an almost savage state. As the -squaw had not forgotten the language of her native people the two white -leaders thought she would prove a valuable help to them in the wild -country westward, and persuaded her and her husband to go on with them. - -As the weather was fine the party traveled rapidly, and by April 26th -reached the mouth of the Yellowstone. They were now very far north, -near the northwest corner of what is the state of North Dakota. Game -was still plentiful but the banks of the river were covered with a -coating of alkali salts, which made the water of the streams bitter and -unpleasant for drinking. Occasionally they came upon a deserted Indian -camp, but in this northern territory they found few roving tribes. When -there was a favorable wind they sailed along the Missouri, but most of -the time they had to use their oars. Early in May they drew up their -birch canoes for the night at the mouth of a stream where they found a -large number of porcupines feeding on young willow trees. Captain Lewis -christened the stream Porcupine River. Here there were quantities of -game, and elk and buffalo in abundance, so that it was an easy matter to -provide food for all the party. - -Now they were continually coming upon new rivers, many of them broad, -with swift-flowing currents, and all of them appealing to the love of -exploration. The Missouri was their highroad, however, and so they -simply stopped to name the different streams they came to. One they -passed had a peculiar white color, and Captain Lewis called it the Milk -River. The country along this stream was bare for some distance, with -gradually rising hills beyond. - -The game here was very plentiful and the buffaloes were so tame that the -men were obliged to drive them away with sticks and stones. The only -dangerous animal was the grizzly bear, a beast that never seemed to know -when he had had enough of a fight. One evening the men in the canoes -saw a large grizzly lying some three hundred paces from the shore. Six -of them landed and hid behind a small hillock within forty paces of the -bear; four of the hunters fired, and each lodged a ball in the bear's -body. The animal sprang up and roared furiously at them. As he came near -them the two hunters who had not yet fired gave him two more wounds, -one of which broke a shoulder, but before they had time to reload their -guns, the bear was so near them that they had to run for the river. -He almost overtook them; two jumped into the canoes; the other four -separated, and hiding in the willows fired as fast as they could reload -their guns. Again and again they shot him, but each time the shots -only seemed to attract his attention toward the hunters, until finally -he chased two of them so closely that they threw away their guns, and -jumped down a steep bank into the river. The bear sprang after them, and -was almost on top of the rear man when one of the others on shore shot -him in the head, and finally killed him. They dragged him to shore, and -found that eight balls had gone through him in different directions. The -hunters took the bear's skin back to camp, and there they learned that -another adventure had occurred. One of the other canoes, which contained -all the provisions, instruments, and numerous other important articles, -had been under sail when it was struck on the side by a sudden squall -of wind. The man at the helm, who was one of the worst navigators of -the party, made the mistake of luffing the boat into the wind. The -wind was so high that it forced the brace of the square-sail out of the -hand of the man who was holding it, and instantly upset the canoe. The -boat would have turned upside down but for the resistance of the canvas -awning. The other boats hastened to the rescue, righted the canoe, and -by baling her out kept her from sinking. They rowed the canoe to shore -and the cargo was saved. Had it been lost the expedition would have been -deprived of most of the things that were necessary for its success, at -a distance of between two and three thousand miles from any place where -they could get supplies. - -On May 20th they reached the yellowish waters of the Musselshell River. -A short distance beyond this Captain Lewis caught his first view of -the Rocky Mountains, one of the goals toward which they were tending. -Along the Musselshell the country was covered with wild roses and small -honeysuckle, but soon after they came into a region that was very -bare and dry, where both game and timber were scarce, the mosquitoes -annoying, the noonday sun uncomfortably hot, and the nights very cold. -The Missouri River, along which they were still traveling, was now -heading to the southwest. They were near the border of the present state -of Idaho when they passed several old Indian camps, most of which seemed -to have been deserted for five or six weeks. From this fact they judged -that they were following a band of about one hundred lodges, who were -traveling up the same river. They knew that the Minnetarees of the -Missouri often traveled as far west as the Yellowstone, and presumed -that the Indians ahead of them belonged to that tribe. There were other -evidences of the Indians. At the foot of a cliff they found the bodies -of a great many slaughtered buffaloes, which had been hunted after the -fashion of the Blackfeet. Their way of hunting was to select one of the -most active braves, and disguise him by tying a buffalo skin around his -body, fastening the skin of the head, with ears and horns, over the head -of the brave. Thus disguised the Indian would take a position between a -herd of buffalo and the precipice overlooking a river. The other hunters -would steal back of the herd, and at a given signal chase them. The -buffaloes would run in the direction of the disguised brave, who would -lead them on at full speed toward the river. As he reached the edge he -would quickly hide himself in some crevice or ravine of the cliff, which -he had chosen beforehand, and the herd would be left on the brink. The -buffaloes in front could not stop being driven on by those behind, who -in their turn would be closely pursued by the hunters. The whole herd, -therefore, would usually rush over the cliff, and the hunters could take -their pick of hides and meat in the river below. This method of hunting -was very extravagant, but at that time the Indians had no thought of -preserving the buffaloes. One of the rivers Lewis passed in this region -he named the Slaughter River, on account of this way of hunting. - -When the Missouri turned southward the explorers came to many steep -rapids, around which the canoes had to be carried, which made traveling -slow. Often the banks were so steep and the mud so thick that the men -were obliged to take off their moccasins, and much of the time they were -up to their arms in the cold water of the river. But there was a great -deal to charm the eye in the opening spring, even in that bare country. -Lewis found places near the river filled with choke-cherries, yellow -currants, wild roses, and prickly pears in full bloom. In the distance -the mountains, rising in long greenish-blue chains, the tops covered -with snow, invited the travelers to find what lay on the other side of -their ridges. - -On June 3d they reached a place where the river divided into two wide -streams, and it became very important to decide which of the two was -the one that the Indians called the Ahmateahza, or Missouri, which they -had said approached very near to the Columbia River. Lewis knew that -the success of his expedition depended largely upon choosing the right -stream, because if, after they had ascended the Rocky Mountains beyond, -they should find that the river they had taken did not bring them near -the Columbia, they would have to return, and thereby would lose a large -part of the summer, which was the only season when they could travel. -For this reason he decided to send out two exploring parties. He himself -made a two days' march up the north branch, and deciding that this was -not the Missouri, he named it Maria's River. As they came back they had -to walk along high cliffs, and at one steep point Captain Lewis slipped, -and, if he had not been able to catch himself with his mountain stick, -would have been thrown into the river. He had just reached a point of -safety when he heard a man behind him call out, "Good God, captain, what -shall I do?" Turning instantly he found that his companion had lost his -footing on the narrow pass, and had slipped down to the very edge of the -precipice, where he lay with his right arm and leg over the cliff, while -with the other arm and leg he was trying to keep from slipping over. -Lewis saw the danger, but calmly told the other to take his knife from -his belt with his right hand, and dig a hole in the side of the bluff in -which to stick his foot. With great presence of mind the man did this, -and getting a foothold, raised himself on his knees. Lewis then told him -to take off his moccasins, and crawl forward on his hands and knees, his -knife in one hand and his rifle in the other. In this manner the man -regained a secure place on the cliff. - -Captain Lewis considered that this method of traveling was too -dangerous, and he ordered the rest of the party to wade the river at the -foot of the bluff, where the water was only breast-high. This adventure -taught them the danger of crossing the slippery heights above the -stream, but as the plains were broken by ravines almost as difficult -to pass, they kept on down the river, sometimes wading in the mud -of the low grounds, sometimes in the water, but when that became too -deep, cutting footholds in the river bank with their knives. On that -particular day they traveled through rain, mud, and water for eighteen -miles, and at night camped in a deserted Indian lodge built of sticks. -Here they cooked part of the six deer they had killed in the day's -traveling, and slept on willow boughs they piled inside the lodge. - -Many of the party thought that the north fork was the Missouri River, -but Lewis and Clark were both convinced that the south fork was the real -Missouri. They therefore hid their heaviest boat and all the supplies -they could spare, and prepared to push on with as little burden as -possible. A few days later Lewis was proved to be right in his judgment -of the south fork, for on June 13th he came to the Great Falls of the -Missouri. The grandeur of the falls made a tremendous impression on -them all. The river, three hundred yards wide, was shut in by steep -cliffs, and for ninety yards from the left cliff the water fell in a -smooth sheet over a precipice of eighty feet. The rest of the river shot -forward with greater force, and, being broken by projecting rocks, sent -clouds of foam into the air. As the water struck the basin below the -falls it beat furiously against the ledge of rocks that extended across -the river, and Lewis found that for three miles below the stream was one -line of rapids and cascades, overhung by bluffs. Five miles above the -first falls the whole river was blocked by one straight shelf of rock, -over which the water ran in an even sheet, a majestic sight. - -This part of the Missouri, however, offered great difficulties to their -travel. The men had now journeyed constantly for several months, and -were in a region of steep falls and rapids. It was clear that they could -not carry the boats on their shoulders for long distances. Fortunately -they found a small creek at the foot of the falls, and by this they were -able to reach the highlands. From there Lieutenant Clark and a few men -surveyed the trail they were to follow, while others hunted and prepared -stores of dried meat, and the carpenter built a carriage to transport -the boats. They found a large cottonwood tree, about twenty-two inches -in diameter, which provided them with the carriage wheels. They decided -to leave one of their boats behind, and use its mast for two axle-trees. - -Meantime Clark studied the river and found that a series of rapids -made a perilous descent, and that a portage of thirteen miles would be -necessary. The country was difficult for traveling, being covered with -patches of prickly pears, the needles of which cut through the moccasins -of the men who dragged the boat's carriage. To add to the difficulty, -when they were about five miles from their goal the axle-trees broke, -and then the tongues of green cottonwood gave way. They had to stop -and search for a substitute, and finally found willow trees, which -provided them with enough wood to patch up the boat-carriage. Half a -mile from their new camping place the carriage broke again, and this -time they found it easier to carry boat and baggage than to build a -new conveyance. Captain Lewis described the state of his party at this -portage. "The men," he wrote, "are loaded as heavily as their strength -will permit; the crossing is really painful; some are limping with the -soreness of their feet, others are scarcely able to stand for more than -a few minutes from the heat and fatigue; they are all obliged to halt -and rest frequently, and at almost every stopping place they fall, and -many of them are asleep in an instant." - -As they had to go back to the other side of the rapids for the stores -they had left, they were obliged to repair the carriage and cross the -portage again and again. After ten days' work all their stores were -above the falls. - -While they were busy making this portage they had several narrow escapes -from attacks by grizzly bears. The bears were so bold that they would -walk into the camp at night, attracted by buffalo meat, and the sleeping -men were in danger from their claws. A tremendous storm added to their -discomfort, and the hailstones were driven so furiously by the high wind -that they wounded some of the men. Before the storm Lieutenant Clark, -with his colored servant York, the half-breed Chaboneau, and his Indian -wife and young child, had taken the road above the falls on their way -to camp when they noticed a very dark cloud coming up rapidly in the -west. Clark hunted about for shelter, and at length found a ravine -protected by shelving rocks under which they could take refuge. Here -they were safe from the rain, and they laid down their guns, compass, -and the other articles they had with them. Rain and hail beat upon their -shelter, and the rain began to fall in such solid sheets that it washed -down rocks and mud from higher up the ravine. Then a landslide started, -but just before the heaviest part of it struck them Lieutenant Clark -seized his gun in one hand, and pushed the Indian woman, her child in -her arms, up the bank. Her husband also caught at her and pulled her -along, but he was so much frightened at the noise and danger that but -for Clark's steadiness he, with his wife and child, would probably have -been lost. As it was, Clark could hardly climb as fast as the water -rose. Had they waited a minute longer they would have been swept into -the Missouri just above the Great Falls. They reached the top in safety, -and there found York, who had left them just before the storm to hunt -some buffalo. They pushed on to camp where the rest of the party had -already taken shelter, and had abandoned all work for that day. - -While the men were building a new boat of skins, Captain Lewis spent -much time studying the animals, trees, and plants of the region, making -records of them to take home. Ever since their arrival at the falls -they had heard a strange noise coming from the mountains a little to the -north of west. "It is heard at different periods of the day and night," -Lewis wrote, "sometimes when the air is perfectly still and without a -cloud, and consists of one stroke only, or of five or six discharges -in quick succession. It is loud, and resembles precisely the sound -of a six-pound piece of ordnance at the distance of three miles. The -Minnetarees frequently mentioned this noise like thunder, which they -said the mountains made; but we paid no attention to it, believing it to -have been some superstition, or perhaps a falsehood. The watermen also -of the party say that the Pawnees and Ricaras give the same account of a -noise heard in the Black Mountains to the westward of them. The solution -of the mystery given by the philosophy of the watermen is, that it is -occasioned by the bursting of the rich mines of silver confined within -the bosom of the mountain." - -Early in July the new boat was finished. It was very strong, and yet -could be carried easily by five men. But when it was first launched -they found that the tar-like material with which they had covered the -skins that made the body of the boat would not withstand water, and so -the craft leaked. After trying to repair the boat for several days they -finally decided to abandon it. Putting all their luggage into the canoes -they resumed their journey up the river. - -As the canoes were heavily loaded the men who were not needed to paddle -them walked along the shore. The country here was very picturesque. At -times they climbed hills that gave them wide views of open country never -explored by white men; again they waded through fields of wild rye, -reminding them of the farm lands of the East; sometimes their path wound -through forests of redwood trees, and always they could see the high -mountains, still snow-capped. The glistening light on the mountain tops -told the explorers why they were called the Shining Mountains. - -Game was now less plentiful, and as they had to save the dried meat -for the crossing of the mountains, it became a problem to provide -food for the party of thirty-two people, who usually consumed a daily -supply equal to an elk and deer, four deer or one buffalo. The wild -berries, however, were now ripe, and as there were quantities of these -they helped to furnish the larder. There were red, purple, yellow, and -black currants, gooseberries, and service-berries. The sunflower grew -everywhere. Lewis wrote in his diary: "The Indians of the Missouri, more -especially those who do not cultivate maize, make great use of the seed -of this plant for bread or in thickening their soup. They first parch -and then pound it between two stones until it is reduced to a fine meal. -Sometimes they add a portion of water, and drink it thus diluted; at -other times they add a sufficient proportion of marrow grease to reduce -it to the consistency of common dough and eat it in that manner. This -last composition we preferred to all the rest, and thought it at that -time a very palatable dish." - -The Missouri now flowed to the south, and on July 18th the party reached -a wide stream, which they named Dearborn River in honor of the Secretary -of War. Lewis meant to send back a small party in canoes from this -point, but as he had not yet met the Snake Indians, and was uncertain -as to their friendliness, he decided he had better not weaken his -expedition here. He, however, sent Clark with three men on a scouting -trip. Clark found an old Indian road, which he followed, but the prickly -pears cut the feet of his men so badly that he could not go far. Along -his track he strewed signals, pieces of cloth and paper, to show the -Indians, if they should cross that trail, that the party was composed -of white men. Before he returned the main party had discovered a great -column of smoke up the valley, and suspected that this was an Indian -signal to show that their approach had been discovered. Afterward they -learned that this was the fact. The Indians had heard one of Clark's men -fire a gun, and, taking alarm, had fled into the mountains, giving the -smoke signal to warn the rest of the tribe. - -The high mountains now began to draw close to the expedition, and they -camped one night at a place called the Gates of the Rocky Mountains. -Here tremendous rocks rose directly from the river's edge almost twelve -hundred feet in the air; at the base they were made of black granite, -but the upper part Lewis decided was probably flint of a yellowish brown -and cream color. On July 25th the advance guard reached the three forks -of the Missouri. Chaboneau was ill, and they had to wait until Lewis -and the others caught up. They named the forks of the river Gallatin, -Madison, and Jefferson, in honor of the statesmen of those names. It was -at this place that the Indian squaw Sacajawea had been in camp with her -tribe five years before when the Minnetarees attacked them, killed some, -and made a prisoner of her and some others. Lewis hoped that she would -be able to help them if they should fall in with bands of her own tribe. - -As the main stream ended here, the party now followed the Jefferson -River. They soon decided that it would be necessary to secure horses -if they were to cross the mountains, and Lewis with three men set out -to try to find the Shoshone Indians, from whom they might buy mounts. -After several hours' march they saw a man on horseback coming across the -plain toward them; examining him through the glass Lewis decided that -he belonged to a different tribe of Indians from any that they had yet -met, probably the Shoshones. He was armed with a bow and a quiver of -arrows, and rode a good horse without a saddle, a small string attached -to the lower jaw answering as a bridle. Lewis was anxious to convince -him that the white men meant to be friendly, and went toward him at his -usual pace. When they were still some distance apart the Indian suddenly -stopped. Lewis immediately stopped also, and taking his blanket from -his knapsack, and holding it with both hands at the four corners threw -it above his head and then unfolded it as he brought it to the ground, -as if in the act of spreading it. This signal, which was intended to -represent the spreading of a robe as a seat for guests, was the common -sign of friendship among the Indian tribes of the Missouri and the Rocky -Mountains. Lewis repeated the sign three times, and then taking some -beads, a looking-glass, and a few other trinkets from his knapsack, and -leaving his gun, walked on toward the Indian. But when he was within -two hundred yards of him the Indian turned his horse and began to ride -away. Captain Lewis then called to him, using words of the Shoshones. -The captain's companions now walked forward, also, and their advance -evidently frightened the Indian, for he suddenly whipped his horse and -disappeared in a clump of willow bushes. When they returned to the -camp Lewis packed some more Indian gifts in his knapsack, and fastened -a small United States flag to a pole to be carried by one of the men, -which was intended as a friendly signal should the Indians see them -advancing. - -The next day brought them to the head-waters of the Jefferson River, -rising from low mountains. They had now reached the sources of the -great Missouri River, a place never before seen by white men. From this -distant spot flowed the waters that traversed a third of the continent, -finally flowing into the Mississippi near St. Louis. - -Leaving the river, they followed an Indian road through the hills, and -reached the top of a ridge from which they could see more mountains, -partly covered with snow. The ridge on which they stood marked the -dividing line between the waters of the Atlantic and the Pacific Oceans. -Going down the farther side they came to a creek, which was part of -the Columbia River; near this was a spring. They gathered enough dry -willow brush for fuel, and halted for the night. Here they ate their -last piece of pork, and had only a little flour and parched meal left -in the way of provisions. Early next day Lewis went forward on foot, -hoping to find some Indians. After several hours he saw three; but they -fled away. Later he came upon three Indian women; one of them ran, but -the other two, an elderly woman and a little girl, approached, evidently -thinking that the strangers were too near for them to escape, and sat -down on the ground. Lewis put down his rifle and walking to them, took -the woman by the hand, and helped her up. He then rolled up his shirt -sleeve to show that he was a white man, since his hands and face were -almost as dark as an Indian's. His companions joined him, and they gave -the Indians some pewter mirrors, beads, and other presents. He painted -the women's cheeks with some vermilion paint, which was the Shoshone -custom, meaning peace. He then made them understand by signs that he -wished to go to their camp to see their chiefs. The squaw led the white -men along a road for some two miles, when they met a band of sixty -mounted warriors riding toward them. Again Lewis dropped his rifle, and -courageously marched out to deal with these unknown red men. The chief -and two others galloped up in advance and spoke to the women, who showed -them the presents they had just received. Then the three Indians leaped -from their horses, and coming up to Lewis, put their arms about him in -friendly greeting, at the same time rubbing their cheeks against his and -smearing considerable paint on his face. The other white men advanced -and were greeted in the same way. Lewis gave presents to the warriors, -and, lighting a pipe, offered it to them for the "smoke of peace." -Before they smoked it, however, the Indians took off their moccasins, -a custom which meant that they would go barefooted forever, before -they broke their treaty of friendship with their friends. The chief -then turned and led the white men and his warriors to their camp. Here -the white men were invited into a leathern lodge, and seated on green -boughs and antelope skins. A small fire was lit in the centre. Again -taking off their moccasins, the chief lighted a pipe made of some highly -polished green stone; after some words in his own tongue he handed the -pipe to Captain Lewis, who then handed it to the other white men. -Each took a few whiffs, and then passed it back to the warriors. After -this ceremony was finished, Lewis explained that they were in great -need of food. The chief presented them with cakes made of sun-dried -service-berries and choke-cherries. Later another warrior gave them -a piece of boiled antelope, and some fresh roasted salmon, the first -salmon Lewis had seen, which convinced him that he was now on the waters -of the Columbia River. He learned that the Indians had received word of -the advance of his party, whom they at first took to be a hostile tribe, -and had therefore set out, prepared for an attack. As a further sign of -good-will, the white men were invited to witness an Indian dance, which -lasted nearly all night. It was late when the white men, tired by their -long day's journey, were allowed to take their rest. - -On the next day Captain Lewis tried to persuade the Shoshones to -accompany him across the divide in order to assist in bringing his -baggage over. It took considerable argument to get the Indians to do -this, and he had to promise them more gifts and arouse their curiosity -by telling them that there were a black man and a native Indian woman -in his camp, before he could induce them to consent. Finally the chief, -Cameahwait, and several of his warriors agreed to go with Lewis. When -they reached the place where the rest of the party were camped the chief -was surprised and delighted to find that the Indian woman, Sacajawea, -was his own sister, whom he had not seen since she had been captured -by the enemies of his tribe. Clark's negro servant, York, caused much -amazement to the Indians, who had never seen a man of his color before. -Lewis then had a long talk with the Shoshones, telling them of the great -power of the government he represented, and of the advantages they would -receive by trading with the white men. Presently he won their good-will, -and they agreed to give him four horses in exchange for firearms and -other articles. Sacajawea was of the greatest help in the talk between -the white men and the Shoshones, and it was she who finally induced her -brother to do all he could to assist the explorers. - -Lewis now sent Clark ahead to explore the route along the Columbia -River, and to build canoes if possible. The Indians had told him that -their road would lie over steep, rocky mountains, where there would be -little or no game, and then for ten days across a sandy desert. Clark -pushed on, and found all the Indians' reports correct. He met a few -small parties of Indians, but they had no provisions to spare, and his -men were soon exhausted from hunger and the weariness of marching over -mountains. His expedition proved that it would be impossible for the -main party to follow this river, to which he gave the name of Lewis, and -he returned to the camp of the Shoshones, which Lewis and the others had -made their headquarters. - -In this camp the white men made preparations for the rest of their -journey. They finally obtained twenty-nine young horses and saddles -for them. They also studied the history and habits of this tribe, who -had once been among the most powerful, but had been lately defeated in -battle by their neighbors. The Shoshones were also called the Snake -Indians, and lived along the rivers of the northwest, fishing for salmon -and hunting buffaloes. Their chief wealth lay in their small, wiry -horses, which were very sure-footed and fleet, and to which they paid a -great deal of attention. - -On August 27th the expedition started afresh, with twenty-nine -packhorses, heading across the mountains to other Indian encampments on -another branch of the Columbia. Travel was slow, as in many places they -had to cut a road for the ponies, and often the path was so rough that -the heavily-burdened horses would slip and fall. Snow fell at one time, -and added to the difficulty of the journey, but by September 6th they -had passed the mountain range, and had come into a wide valley, at the -head of a stream they called Clark's Fork of the Columbia. Here they -met about four hundred Ootlashoot Indians, to whom they gave presents -in exchange for fresh horses. Continuing again, they reached Traveler's -Rest Creek, and here they stopped to hunt, as the Indians had told them -that the country ahead held no game. After refurnishing their larder -they pushed on westward, and ran into another snow-storm, which made -riding more difficult than ever. Their provisions were soon exhausted, -game was lacking, and the situation was discouraging. The march had -proved very tiring, and there was no immediate prospect of reaching -better country. Lewis, therefore, sent Clark with six hunters ahead, -but this light scouting party was able to find very little game, and -was nearly exhausted, when on September 20th Clark came upon a village -of the Chopunish or Nez Percés Indians, in a beautiful valley. These -Indians had fish, roots, and berries, which they gave the white men, who -at once sent some back to Lewis and the others. These provisions reached -the main party at a time when they had been without food for more than a -day. Strengthened by the supplies, and encouraged by news of the Indian -village, they hastened forward, and reached the Nez Percés' encampment. - -Their stock of firearms and small articles enabled them to buy -provisions from these Indians; and they moved on to the forks of the -Snake River, where they camped for several days, to enable the party -to regain its strength. They built five canoes in the Indian fashion, -and launched them on the river, which they hoped would lead them to the -ocean. Lewis hid his saddles and extra ammunition, and, having branded -the horses, turned them over to three Indians, who agreed to take care -of them until the party should return. - -The Snake River, flowing through beautiful country, was filled with -rapids, and they had many hardships in passing them. At one place a -canoe struck a rock, and immediately filled with water and sank. Several -of the men could not swim, and were rescued with difficulty. At the -same time they had to guard their supplies carefully at night from -wandering Indians, who, although they were friendly, could not resist -the temptation to steal small articles of all sorts. The rapids passed, -the river brought them into the main stream of the Lewis River, and -this in turn led them to the junction of the Lewis and Columbia Rivers, -which they reached on October 17th. Here they parted from the last of -the Nez Percés Indians. The Columbia had as many rapids as the smaller -river, and in addition they came to the Great Falls, where they had to -lower the canoes by ropes made of elkskin. At one or two places they -had to make portages, but as this involved a great deal of extra labor, -they tried to keep to the stream wherever they could. At one place a -tremendous rock jutted into the river, leaving a channel only forty-five -yards wide through which the Columbia passed, its waters tossed into -great whirlpools and wild currents. Lewis decided that it would be -impossible to carry the boats over this high rock, and determined -to rely on skillful steering of them through the narrow passage. He -succeeded in doing this, although Indians whom he had met shortly before -had told him that it was impossible. At several places they landed most -of the men and all the valuable articles, and the two chief explorers -took the canoes through the rapids themselves, not daring to trust the -navigation to less experienced hands. - -In this far-western country they were continually meeting wandering -Indians, and they learned from them that the Pacific Ocean was not far -distant. On October 28th Lewis found an Indian wearing a round hat and -sailor's jacket, which had been brought up the river in trade, and -soon after he found other red men wearing white men's clothes. On the -thirty-first they came to more falls. Here they followed the example -of their Indian friends, and carried the canoes and baggage across the -slippery rocks to the foot of the rapids. The large canoes were brought -down by slipping them along on poles, which were stretched from one rock -to another. They had to stop constantly to make repairs to the boats, -which had weathered all sorts of currents, and had been buffeted against -innumerable rocks and tree-trunks. Then they discovered tide-water in -the river, and pushed on eagerly to a place called Diamond Island. Here, -Lewis wrote, "we met fifteen Indians ascending the river in two canoes; -but the only information we could procure from them was that they had -seen three vessels, which we presumed to be European, at the mouth of -the Columbia." - -They came to more and more Indian villages, generally belonging to the -Skilloot tribe, who were very friendly, but who were too sharp at a -bargain to please Captain Lewis. On November 7, 1805, they reached a -point from which they could see the ocean. Lewis says: "The fog cleared -off, and we enjoyed the delightful prospect of the ocean--that ocean, -the object of all our labors, the reward of all our anxieties. This -cheering view exhilarated the spirits of all the party, who were still -more delighted on hearing the distant roar of the breakers, and went on -with great cheerfulness." - -It was late in the year, and the captain wished to push on so that he -might winter on the coast, but a heavy storm forced them to land and -seek refuge under a high cliff. The waves on the river were very high, -and the wind was blowing a gale directly from the sea; great waves broke -over the place where they camped, and they had to use the utmost care -to save their canoes from being smashed by drifting logs. Here they -had to stay for six days, in which time their clothes and food were -drenched, and their supply of dried fish exhausted; but the men bore -these trials lightly now that they were so near the Pacific Ocean. When -the gale ended they explored the country for a good place to establish -their winter quarters. The captain finally decided to locate on a point -of high land above the river Neutel, well beyond the highest tide, and -protected by a grove of lofty pines. Here they made their permanent -camp, which was called Fort Clatsop. They built seven wooden huts in -which to spend the winter. They lived chiefly on elk, to which they -added fish and berries in the early spring. A whale stranded on the -beach provided them with blubber, and they found salt on the shore. The -winter passed without any unusual experiences, and gave the captain an -opportunity to make a full record of the country through which he had -passed, and of the Indian tribes he had met. - -The original plan was to remain at Fort Clatsop until April, when Lewis -expected to renew his stock of merchandise from the trading vessels, -which visited the mouth of the Columbia every spring; but as the winter -passed the constant rain brought sickness among the men, and game grew -more and more scarce, so that it was decided to make an earlier return. -Before they did this Lewis wrote out an account of his expedition, and -arranged to have this delivered to the trading vessels when they should -arrive, and in this way the news of his discoveries would not be lost -in case anything should happen to his own party. The Indians agreed to -deliver the packets, and one of the messages, carried by an American -trader, finally reached Boston by way of China in February, 1807, some -six months after Lewis himself had returned to the East. On March 24, -1806, they started back on their long route of four thousand one hundred -and forty-four miles to St. Louis. - -Searching for fish, they found the Multonah or Willamette River, and -Lewis wrote that the valley of this stream would furnish the only -desirable place of settlement west of the Rocky Mountains. Here he -found rich prairies, plenty of fish and game, unusual plants of various -sorts, and abundant timber. Soon they reached the village of the Walla -Walla Indians, who received them so hospitably that the captain said of -all the Indians they had met since leaving the United States this tribe -was the most honest and sincere. With twenty-three horses, and Walla -Walla Indians as guides, they followed a new road up the valley of the -Lewis or Snake River, which saved them eighty miles of their westward -route. It was still too early to cross the mountains, and they camped -near the place where they had trusted their thirty-eight horses to their -Indian friends the autumn before. The Indians returned the horses in -exchange for merchandise, and Lewis provided them with food. In all -these meetings the squaw wife of the French trader was invaluable. -Usually Lewis spoke in English, which was translated by one of his men -into French for the benefit of the trapper Chaboneau, who repeated it -in the tongue of the Minnetarees to his wife; she would then repeat -the words in the Shoshone tongue, and most of the Indians could then -understand them, or some could repeat them to the others in their own -dialect. - -Early in June they tried to cross the mountains, but the snow was -ten feet deep on a level, and they had to abandon the attempt until -late in the month. They finally crossed, and found their trail of -the previous September. At this point the party divided in order to -explore different parts of the country. Lewis took a direct road to the -Great Falls of the Missouri, where he wished to explore Maria's River. -Clark went on to the head of the Jefferson River, where he was to find -the canoes that they had hidden, and cross by the shortest route to -the Yellowstone; and the two parties were to meet at the mouth of the -Yellowstone River. Lack of game prevented Lewis getting far into the -country along Maria's River. On this journey he fell in with a band -of Minnetarees, and some of them tried to steal his guns and horses. -The only real fight of the journey followed, in which two Indians were -killed. He then continued eastward, and on August 7th reached the mouth -of the Yellowstone, where he found a note telling him that Clark had -camped a few miles below. - -In the meantime Clark had explored a large part of the valleys of the -Jefferson, Gallatin, and Madison Rivers, and had found a boiling-hot -spring at the head of the Wisdom River, one of the first signs of the -wonders of the Yellowstone. His journey was made safely and comfortably, -although at one place he had to stop to build fresh canoes, and during -this delay a band of Indians stole twenty-four of his packhorses. - -The united party descended the Missouri, and found that other explorers -were already following in their track. They met two men from Illinois -who had pushed as far west as the Yellowstone on a hunting trip, and -back of them they heard of hunters and trappers who were pushing into -this unexplored region. Travel homeward was rapid, and on September 23, -1806, the expedition arrived at St. Louis, from which they had started -two years and four months before. At the place where they parted with -the last of the Minnetarees they said goodbye to Chaboneau, his Indian -wife, and child. The squaw had been of the greatest service to them; but -for her it is possible that the expedition might never have been able to -get through the Shoshone country. Lewis offered to take the three to the -United States, but the French trader said that he preferred to remain -among the Indians. He was paid five hundred dollars, which included the -price of a horse and lodge that had been purchased from him. - -The wonderful journey had been a complete success. The explorers had -passed through strange tribes of Indians, dangers from hunger and -hardship in the high mountains, the desert, and the plains, and had -brought back a remarkable record of the scenes and people they had met. -From their reports the people of the United States first learned the -true value of that great Louisiana Territory, which had been bought for -such a small price in money, but which was to furnish homesteads for -thousands of pioneers. The work begun by the brave French explorers of -earlier centuries was brought to a triumphant close by these two native -American discoverers. - - - - -III - -THE CONSPIRACY OF AARON BURR - - -There is a small island in the Ohio River, two miles below the town -of Parkersburg, that is still haunted with the memory of a strange -conspiracy. In 1805 the island, then some three hundred acres in size, -belonged to an Irish gentleman, Harman Blennerhassett, who had built -a beautiful home there and planted fields of hemp. For a time he and -his family lived there in great content, Blennerhassett himself being -devoted to science and to music, but presently he felt the need of -increasing his small fortune and looked about for a suitable enterprise. -Then there was introduced to him a gentleman from New York, a very -well-known man by the name of Aaron Burr. He also was seeking to make -his fortune, and he took Blennerhassett into his confidence. Together -they plotted a conspiracy. They started to put their plans into action, -and many people called them patriots, and many called them traitors. -History does not know all the secrets of that small island, but it tells -a curious story of the conspiracy. - -Aaron Burr was a very talented and fascinating man, but he was a born -adventurer. At this time he was about fifty years old. He had fought -in the Revolution, and practiced law in New York City, where he -divided honors with Alexander Hamilton, the most brilliant attorney -of the period. He had been elected a senator, and then had become -a candidate for President of the United States. In the election of -1800 the Electoral College cast seventy-three votes apiece for Thomas -Jefferson and Aaron Burr, and these two candidates led all the others. -As there was a tie, the choice of President was thrown into the House -of Representatives, and there followed a long and bitter fight. Finally -Jefferson was chosen President, and Burr Vice-President. In the long -campaign Burr made many enemies, chief among whom were the powerful -New York families of Clinton and Livingston. These men charged him -with being a political trickster, and won most of his followers away -from him. When Burr became a candidate for Governor of New York he was -beaten, and his defeat was made more bitter by the stinging attacks of -his old rival, Alexander Hamilton. - -In that day it was still the custom for gentlemen to settle questions -of honor on the dueling field. Burr, stung by Hamilton's criticisms, -challenged him, and the two met on the heights of Weehawken, overlooking -the Hudson River. Here Burr wounded Hamilton so severely that the latter -died a few days later. Hounded by Hamilton's friends, the luckless Burr -now found himself cast out by both the Federalists and Republicans, and -with no political future. Yet he knew that he had unusual talents for -leadership. Still filled with ambition and in great need of money, he -saw that there was little opportunity for him at home, and began to turn -his eyes outside of the Republic. - -The western world was then a wonderful field for daring adventurers. -Thirteen small colonies lying close to the Atlantic Ocean had less than -twenty years before thrown off the yoke of a great European nation. Men -had already pushed west to the Mississippi, and settled the fertile -fields beyond the Alleghanies. Across the great "Mother of Rivers" lay a -vast tract that men knew little about. To the south lay Spanish colonies -and islands. The Gulf of Mexico was the home of freebooters and pirates. -In Europe a man of the people named Napoleon Bonaparte was carving out -an empire for himself, and stirring the blood of all ambitious men. -Soldiers of fortune everywhere were wondering whether they might not -follow in Napoleon's footsteps. - -It is hard to say in which direction Burr was tempted first. He wanted -to hide his real plans not only from his own countrymen, but from the -English, French, and Spanish agents as well. He first pretended to -Anthony Merry, the British minister at Washington, that he intended to -join a conspiracy to start a revolution in the Spanish colonies, in the -hope of turning them into a new republic. Mr. Merry told his government -that it would be to the advantage of England if Mr. Burr's plans -succeeded. But even then Burr was working on a different scheme. He -thought that the people of Louisiana, a large territory at the mouth of -the Mississippi River, which had only lately become a part of the United -States, might be induced to separate into a new nation of their own. He -needed money for his plans, and so he kept pointing out to the British -minister the many advantages to England if either the Spanish colonies -or Louisiana should win freedom. A third plan was also dawning in Burr's -mind, the possibility of entering Mexico and carving out a kingdom -there for himself. So he began by dealing with the agents of different -countries, trying to get money from each for his own secret schemes. - -In the spring of 1805 Burr set out for the West. He took coach for -the journey over the mountains to Pittsburgh, where he had arranged -by letter to meet General James Wilkinson, the governor of the new -territory of Louisiana. Wilkinson was delayed, however, and so Burr -embarked in an ark that he had ordered built to sail down the Ohio -River. After several days on the water he reached Blennerhassett Island -early in May. The owner of the island was away from home, but his wife -invited Burr to their house, and he learned from her that her husband -was looking for a way to mend his fortunes. - -Next day Burr continued his journey in the ark. He reached Cincinnati, -then a very small town of fifteen hundred people, where he talked over -his plans with several friends. From Cincinnati he went to Louisville, -and from there rode to Frankfort. At Nashville he was the guest of -Andrew Jackson, who was major-general of the Tennessee militia. Word -spread about that Aaron Burr was plotting to free Florida and the West -Indies from Spanish rule, and the liberty-loving settlers welcomed him -with open arms. - -Leaving Andrew Jackson, Burr floated in an open boat to the mouth of -the Cumberland River, where his ark, which had come down the Ohio, was -waiting for him. The ark made its first stop at a frontier post called -Fort Massac, and there Burr met General Wilkinson of Louisiana. These -two men were real soldiers of fortune. They had fought side by side at -the walls of Quebec, and Wilkinson, like many another, had fallen under -the spell of Burr's charm. They probably discussed the whole situation: -how a small army might seize Florida, how a small navy could drive the -Spaniards from Cuba, how a daring band of frontiersmen could march from -Vera Cruz to the city of Mexico. Wilkinson seemed delighted with Burr's -schemes, and when he left he provided his friend with a large barge -manned by ten soldiers and a sergeant. - -In this imposing vessel Burr sailed on down the Mississippi to New -Orleans, and on June 25, 1805, landed at that quaint old city. It was -already a place of much importance; seagoing ships and thousands of -river flatboats docked at its levees, for it was the chief port for -sending goods to Mexico and the other Spanish colonies. Burr brought -letters to many prominent people, and a public dinner was given in his -honor. The visitor had been Vice-President of the United States, and was -said to be the leader of a band of mysterious patriots. Enthusiasm ran -high in New Orleans when their guest said, as he had already announced -in Tennessee, that he intended to devote his life to overthrowing all -Spanish rule in America. - -Day after day the soldier of fortune was busy with his plans. When he -started north on horseback he carried with him the fame of a great -patriot. Wherever he stopped, at cabins, at villages, or cities, the -frontiersmen wanted to shake his hand. He rode four hundred and fifty -miles through the wilderness from Natchez to Nashville, where he again -visited Andrew Jackson, who promised him Tennessee soldiers for a war on -Spain. At St. Louis he learned that General Zebulon Pike was exploring -the best route over the plains to Santa Fé, and many letters told him -that the time was ripe to settle old grudges with the borderers of -Mexico. Everything seemed favorable to his adventure. Burr had only -to decide where he would strike first. He was back in the East by the -middle of November, 1805, having filled the whole country with rumors -of wild plots and insurrections. He was a figure of mystery. People -whispered that Aaron Burr was to be the Washington of a new republic in -the West, or the king of a country to be carved out of Mexico. - -By the summer of 1806 Burr knew that he could not get money from England -to further his plans. He would have to depend on his own countrymen in -any attack on Mexico or Spain. His journey had showed him that many -of them were eager to follow his lead. Troubles were daily increasing -along the borders of Florida and Mexico. It looked easy to take an army -into Florida, but there would be more profit in the rich country to the -southwest. His friend, General Wilkinson, had just been sent to drive -the Mexicans across the Sabine River, the western boundary of Louisiana, -and Burr thought this was a good chance to go west again, and perhaps -call the settlers to arms. Men he trusted started west early in the -summer of 1806, and Burr, with his daughter, and a Colonel De Pestre, -who had fought in the French Revolution, and a few friends and servants, -set out in August for their meeting-place on Blennerhassett Island. -When he arrived there he was warmly welcomed by the owner. Burr showed -Blennerhassett how he could make his fortune in Mexico, because if the -conspiracy were successful they could take a large part of that country -for themselves. Fired by Burr's story the men on the island immediately -began preparations. They sent to the town of Marietta for one hundred -barrels of pork, and contracted to have fifteen boats delivered at the -island the following December. A kiln was built near Blennerhassett's -house for drying corn, which was then ground into meal, and packed for -shipping. All sorts of provisions were purchased, and the Blennerhassett -family prepared to send their household goods down the river. Word of -the plans spread, and men in various towns near the Ohio made ready to -join the expedition. When the leader should send out his messengers -recruits would come pouring in. - -In the meantime Burr himself had left the little island and covered a -wide stretch of country. He wanted to be sure of Andrew Jackson's aid, -and he found that fiery warrior as ready as ever to fight Spaniard or -Mexican in the cause of liberty. The general still thought that his -friend Burr's only object was to free all of North America. Eager in -that cause, Jackson sent word to the Tennessee militia, urging them -to be ready for instant duty against the Spaniards, who, he said, had -already captured several citizens of the United States, had cut down -our flag, had driven our explorers away from the Red River, and had -taken an insulting position on the east bank of the River Sabine, in the -territory of Orleans. He wrote to President Jefferson offering to lead -his Tennessee militia against the troops of Spain. A large part of the -country expected war at once. Burr, for his own purposes, did all he -could to inflame this warlike feeling. - -In October the chief conspirator met his daughter, Theodosia Alston, her -husband, and Blennerhassett at Lexington, Kentucky. He now arranged -to buy a tract, known as the Bastrop lands, which included nearly a -million acres in northern Louisiana on the Washita River. This purchase -he meant to use as a blind, intending to settle there only in case his -other plans failed. If the United States Government should suspect -the conspirators of plotting against Mexico, they could pretend to be -merely settlers, armed to defend themselves in case the Spaniards should -overrun their borders. The tract would be valuable in any case, because -of the rich bottom-lands and vast forests, and made a splendid base for -a raid into the Spanish provinces. - -Recruits were added daily to Burr's forces. He told them as much or as -little of his schemes as he thought advisable. To some he said that he -was a secret agent of the government, to others that he only meant to -start a new pioneer settlement. If there should be war with Spain the -men who followed him would share in the spoils, if victorious. If there -was no war they would be ready to protect the border against invaders. - -There were some people, however, who could not get over their distrust -of Burr because of what he had done. The mysterious preparations at -Blennerhassett Island caused some uneasiness in the neighborhood, and -on October 6th a mass meeting of the people of Wood County, Virginia, -was held, and the military preparations on the island were denounced. -Blennerhassett was away at the time, but his wife, hearing of the -meeting, grew uneasy, and sent her gardener, Peter Taylor, to tell her -husband this news. Taylor found the conspirators at Lexington, and gave -them Mrs. Blennerhassett's message. The gardener was evidently taken -into his master's confidence, because he said later that the plan was -"to take Mexico, one of the finest and richest places in the whole -world." He added, "Colonel Burr would be the King of Mexico, and Mrs. -Alston, daughter of Colonel Burr, was to be Queen of Mexico, whenever -Colonel Burr died.... Colonel Burr had made fortunes for many in his -time, but none for himself; but now he was going to make something -for himself. He said that he had a great many friends in the Spanish -territory; no less than two thousand Roman Catholic priests were -engaged, and all their friends would join, if once he could get to them; -that the Spaniards, like the French, had got dissatisfied with their -government, and wanted to swap it." - -President Jefferson could no longer overlook the adventures of Burr and -his friends. He knew that very little was needed to kindle the flame -of war on the Mexican border. But he had his hands full with foreign -affairs; England was making trouble for American sailors, and Napoleon -was setting the whole world by the ears. So the busy President wrote -to his agents in the West and urged them to keep a secret watch over -Colonel Burr and Blennerhassett Island. - -War with Spain almost came that summer. There were many disputed -boundary lines between the United States and the Spanish colonies. The -Spanish troops in Florida, Texas, and Mexico were prepared for an attack -from the United States, and Spanish agents were urging Indian tribes to -rise against the white men. Men protested in Western cities and towns. -The people of Orleans Territory were afraid that Spain was going to try -to win back their country by force of arms. On the 4th of July, 1806, -the people of New Orleans held a great patriotic celebration, and in the -evening a play called, "Washington; or the Liberty of the New World," -was acted to a huge audience. Even the Creoles, who were more Spanish -than Anglo-Saxon, were eager to fight against the old tyranny of Spain. - -In the midst of this war excitement word came that a man born in -Venezuela, named Francesco Miranda, had sailed from New York to free his -native country from Spanish rule. Miranda was looked upon as a hero and -patriot by many people in the United States, and this encouraged Burr -and his friends. - -There were in 1806 about one thousand soldiers in Texas, which was then -a province of Mexico. These troops were ordered to cross the Sabine -River, which formed a part of the disputed boundary, and as soon as -they did cross the governor of Louisiana called for volunteers, and -the people of Mississippi Territory prepared to march to the aid of -New Orleans. The meeting place of the volunteers was Natchitoches, -and there hundreds of countrymen came flocking, armed, and eager to -defend Louisiana. Everything seemed ready for Aaron Burr to launch his -great adventure. But at this point Burr's former friend, General James -Wilkinson, the governor of Louisiana, changed his mind as to the wisdom -of Burr's schemes. He would not give the order to the volunteers to -march to the Mexican border, but waited, hoping that President Jefferson -would prevent the war by diplomacy, or that the Spanish troops would -decide to retreat. - -On September 27th a great crowd in Nashville hailed Colonel Burr as the -deliverer of the Southwest, and Andrew Jackson proclaimed, "Millions for -defense; not one cent for tribute;" and at the same time the Mexican -General Herrera ordered his troops to retreat from the River Sabine. -Danger of war was over, and the moment the flag of Spain left the -Louisiana shore, Burr's dream of an empire for himself and his friends -vanished. - -General Wilkinson knew that the government in Washington was suspicious -of Aaron Burr's plans, and he thought that his name was included among -those of Burr's friends. Some newspapers had even linked their names -together, and the general, knowing perhaps the treachery of his own -thoughts, now decided to prove his patriotism by accusing Aaron Burr and -the others of treason. All the time that he was making a treaty with the -Mexican general on the Texan frontier he was also working up a strong -case against Burr. He saw to it that the agents put all suspicion on -the shoulders of the others, and made him appear as the one man who had -tried his best to protect his country. He intended to show that not only -was he not a traitor, but that he was able to unmask traitors, by having -pretended to join with them earlier. - -In his sudden eagerness to prevent war with the Mexicans, General -Wilkinson made terms of peace with them, which proved a great -disadvantage to the United States at a later date, but which pleased -the peace party of the day. He met the Mexican general at the very time -when Burr and his allies were ready to launch their fleet of boats on -the Mississippi River. Then Wilkinson made haste to raise the cry of -"Treason in the West," which was to echo through the United States for -months, and ruin the reputation of many men. - -President Jefferson trusted Wilkinson, and when he heard the latter's -charges against Burr he sent a special messenger to see what was -happening at Blennerhassett Island. Before the messenger reached the -Alleghany Mountains, however, another man had accused Burr in the court -at Frankfort, Kentucky, of having broken the laws of the country in -starting an expedition against Mexico. Burr said that he could easily -answer these charges, and sent a message to Blennerhassett, telling -him not to be disturbed. He went to the court at Frankfort, and when -the man who had accused him could not bring his witnesses the matter -was promptly dropped. Burr was more a hero than ever to the people of -Frankfort. They agreed with a leading newspaper that said, "Colonel -Burr has throughout this business conducted himself with the calmness, -moderation, and firmness which have characterized him through life. He -evinced an earnest desire for a full and speedy investigation--free from -irritation or emotion; he excited the strongest sensation of respect and -friendship in the breast of every impartial person present." - -Burr then went back to Lexington, and continued raising money to buy -a fleet of boats. Andrew Jackson had already received three thousand -dollars in Kentucky for this purpose. Blennerhassett went on enrolling -volunteers. It looked as if Burr's conduct at Frankfort had put an end -to the rumors of treason. - -General Wilkinson, however, was still anxious to make a name for himself -as a great patriot, and he kept sending alarming messages to Washington. -He accused his former friend of all sorts of treason. It was also -perfectly clear that a large number of boats were being gathered on the -Ohio under orders of Burr and his friends, and so President Jefferson -sent word to the officers at Marietta to post one hundred and fifty or -two hundred soldiers on the river to prevent Burr's fleet sailing. With -the news of this order people in the West began to suspect their former -hero, and even some of his old allies grew doubtful of his patriotism. - -Wilkinson increased the alarm by orders he gave in New Orleans as -governor of Louisiana Territory. He began to make military arrests, -locking up all those he distrusted, and all those who were admirers -of Aaron Burr. He had gunboats stationed in the river, and they were -ordered to fire on Burr's fleet if it ever got that far, and he refused -to allow any boats to ascend the Mississippi without his express -permission. All this preparation caused great excitement in New Orleans, -which spread through the neighboring country. It seemed as if General -Wilkinson were trying to force the people to believe there was some -great conspiracy on foot. - -The colonel and his allies tried to explain that their fleet of boats -was simply to carry settlers, arms and provisions into the Bastrop -tract of land that they had bought; but by now nobody would believe -them. On December 9, 1806, the boats that Blennerhassett had been -gathering on the Muskingum River were seized by order of the governor -of Ohio. Patrols were placed along the Ohio River, and the militia -called out to capture Blennerhassett and the men with him. The next day -the Virginia militia declared that they meant to find out the secret -of Blennerhassett Island. The owner and his friend, Comfort Tyler, had -word of this, and at once prepared for flight. At midnight they left the -island and started down the Ohio by boat. The Virginia troops arrived -to find the place deserted, and, leaving sentinels there, started -in pursuit of Blennerhassett. The next day the sentries captured a -flatboat with fourteen boys on board, who were coming from Pittsburgh -to join Burr. People along the Ohio began to expect attacks from Burr's -recruits. Cincinnati was especially alarmed. One of the newspapers there -stated that three of Burr's armed boats were anchored near the city, -which they meant to attack. That night some practical joker exploded -a bomb, and the people thought that Burr's army was firing on them. -The citizens armed, and the militia was called out, but when they came -to inspect the boats on the river next day they found that those they -thought belonged to Burr were vessels of a Louisville merchant loaded -with dry-goods. No story was now too wild to be believed when it was -attached to the name of Burr or Blennerhassett. - -Burr now only intended to sail down to his own lands. On December 20th -he sent word to Blennerhassett that he would be at the mouth of the -Cumberland River on the twenty-third. Two days later he put a number of -horses on one of his boats, and with a few men to help him, floated down -the Cumberland River to its mouth, where Blennerhassett and the rest -of their party were waiting for him. They joined their seven boats to -his two vessels, and had a fleet of nine ships with about sixty men on -board. On December 28th they sailed down the Ohio, and the next night -anchored a little below Fort Massac. - -Country people along the river saw the flotilla pass, and sent word -of it to the nearest military post. The captain there stopped all -ships, but found nothing suspicious on any of them. "Colonel Burr, late -Vice-President," the officer reported, "passed this way with about ten -boats of different descriptions, navigated with about six men each, -having nothing on board that would even suffer a conjecture more than -that he was a man bound to market. He has descended the river toward -Orleans." - -On the last day of 1806 the fleet reached the broad waters of the -Mississippi River. Four days later they dropped anchor at Chickasaw -Bluffs, now the city of Memphis. Again officers boarded the boats, and -after examining the cargoes allowed them to go on their voyage. On -January 10th they reached Mississippi Territory, and here they found the -excitement intense. - -The fleet was now in territory that was under the charge of General -Wilkinson, and he immediately sent three hundred and seventy-five -soldiers from Natchez to prevent Burr's further progress. On January -16th two officers rowed out to the boats, and were received pleasantly -by Colonel Burr, who laughed at General Wilkinson's suspicions, and, -pointing to his peaceful flotilla, asked if it looked as if it were -meant for war? When he was told that the soldiers had orders to stop -him, he answered that he was willing to appear in court at any time. -This satisfied the two officers, who asked him to ride next day to the -town of Washington, which was the capital of Mississippi Territory, and -appear before the court there. Burr agreed, and early next morning rode -to Washington with the two officers who had called on him. There he was -charged with having conspired against the United States government. His -friends on the river remained on their boats, waiting for his return. -The expedition never went any farther. - -Burr promised to stay in the Territory until the charges against him -were cleared up. His charm of manner won him many friends, and people -would not believe him a traitor. When the grand jury met they decided -that Aaron Burr was not guilty of treason. The judge, however, would -not set him free, and Burr realized that General Wilkinson was using -all his power against him. He thought that his only chance of safety -lay in defying the court, and taking the advice of some friends fled to -a hiding-place near the home of Colonel Osmun, an old acquaintance. He -meant to leave that part of the country, but the severe weather blocked -his plans. Heavy rains had swollen all the streams, and he had to change -his route. He set out with one companion, but had to ask a farmer the -road to the house of Colonel Hinson. The farmer suspected that one of -the horsemen was Aaron Burr, and knew that a large reward had been -offered for his capture. He carried his news to the sheriff, and then -to the officers at Fort Stoddert. A lieutenant from the fort with -four soldiers joined the farmer, and, mounting fast horses, they rode -after the two men. Early the next morning they came up with them. The -lieutenant demanded in the name of the government of the United States -whether one of the horsemen was Colonel Burr. Aaron Burr admitted his -name, and was put under arrest. He was taken to the fort, and held there -as a fugitive from justice. - -The cry of "Treason in the West" had been heard all over the country. -The great expedition against Mexico had dwindled to a small voyage to -settle certain timber-lands. The formidable fleet was only nine ordinary -river boats. The army of rebels had shrunk to less than sixty peaceful -citizens; and the store of arms and ammunition had been reduced to a few -rifles and powder-horns. Moreover Aaron Burr had neither attempted to -fight nor to resist arrest. He had merely fled when he thought he stood -little chance of a fair trial. Yet the cry of treason had so alarmed the -country that the government found it necessary to try the man who had so -nearly defeated Jefferson for the Presidency. - -Orders were sent to bring Aaron Burr east. After a journey that lasted -twenty-one days the prisoner was lodged in the Eagle Tavern in Richmond, -Virginia. Here Chief-Justice Marshall examined the charges against Burr, -and held him in bail to appear at the next term of court. The bail was -secured, and on the afternoon of April 1st Burr was once more set at -liberty. From then until the day of the trial interest in the case grew. -Everywhere people discussed the question whether Aaron Burr had been a -traitor to his country. By the time for the hearing of the case feeling -against him ran high. When court met on May 22, 1807, Richmond was -crowded with many of the most prominent men of the time, drawn by the -charges against a man who had so lately been Vice-President. - -It was not until the following August that Colonel Burr was actually -put on trial. The question was simply whether he had planned to make -war against the United States. There were many witnesses, led by the -faithless General Wilkinson, who were ready to declare that the purpose -of the meetings at Blennerhassett Island was to organize an army to -divide the western country from the rest of the republic. Each side was -represented by famous lawyers; and the battle was hard fought. In the -end, however, the jury found that Aaron Burr was not guilty of treason. -No matter what Burr and Blennerhassett and their friends had planned to -do in Mexico, the jury could not believe they had been so mad as to plot -a war against the United States. - -Burr, although now free, was really a man without a country. He went to -England and France, and in both countries engaged in plans for freeing -the colonies of Spain. But both in England and in France the people -looked upon him with suspicion, remembering his strange history. At the -end of four years he returned to the United States. Here he found that -some of his early plans were coming to fulfilment. Revolts were breaking -out in Florida, in Mexico, and in some of the West Indies. He was -allowed no part in any of these uprisings. Florida became a part of the -United States, and in time Burr saw the men of Texas begin a struggle -for freedom from Mexico. When he read the news of this, he exclaimed, -"There! You see! I was right! I was only thirty years too soon. What was -treason in me thirty years ago is patriotism now!" Later he was asked -whether he had really planned to divide the Union when he started on his -voyage from Blennerhassett Island. He answered, "No; I would as soon -have thought of taking possession of the moon, and informing my friends -that I intended to divide it among them." - -Such is the story of Aaron Burr, a real soldier of fortune, who wanted -to carve out a new country for himself, and came to be "a man without a -country." - - - - -IV - -HOW THE YOUNG REPUBLIC FOUGHT THE BARBARY PIRATES - - -I - -Long after pirates had been swept from the Western Ocean they flourished -in the Mediterranean Sea. They hailed from the northern coast of Africa, -where between the Mediterranean and the desert of Sahara stretched what -were known as the Barbary States. These states were Morocco, Algeria, -Tunis, Tripoli, and the tiny state of Barca, which was usually included -in Tripoli. Algeria, or, as it was commonly called from the name of its -capital, Algiers, was the home of most of the Mediterranean pirates. - -There was hardly a port in the whole of that inland sea that had not -seen a fleet of the pirates' boats sweep down upon some innocent -merchant vessel, board her, overpower the crew, and carry them off -to be sold in the African slave-markets. Their ships were usually -square-rigged sailing vessels, which were commonly called galleons. The -pirates did not trust to cannon, and the peculiar shape of the ships -gave them a good chance for hand-to-hand fighting. The dark-skinned crew -would climb out on the long lateen yards that hung over their enemies' -deck, and drop from the yards and from the rigging, their sabers held -between their teeth, their loaded pistols stuck in their belts, so that -they might have free use of their hands for climbing and clinging to -ropes and gunwales. - -Strange as it seems, the great countries of Europe made no real effort -to destroy these pirates of the Barbary coast, but instead actually -paid them bribes in order to protect their crews. The larger countries -thought that, as they could afford to pay the tribute that the pirates -demanded, and their smaller rivals could not, the pirates might actually -serve them by annoying other countries. So England and France, and the -other big nations of Europe, put up with all sorts of insults at the -hands of these Moorish buccaneers, and many times their consuls were -ill-treated and their sailors made to work in slave-gangs because they -had not paid as much tribute as the Moors demanded. - -Many an American skipper fell into the hands of these corsairs. The brig -_Polly_ of Newburyport, Massachusetts, was heading for the Spanish port -of Cadiz in October, 1793, when she was overhauled by a brig flying the -English flag. As the brig came near her captain hailed the _Polly_ in -English, asking where she was bound. Meanwhile the brig ran close in -beside the _Polly_, and the Americans saw a large number of men, Moors -by the look of their beards and dress, spring up from under the rail. -This crew launched a big boat, and nearly one hundred men, armed with -swords, pistols, spears, and knives, were rowed up to the _Polly_. The -Moors sprang on board. The Yankees were greatly outnumbered, and were -driven into the cabin, while the pirates broke open all the trunks -and chests, and stripped the brig of everything that could be moved. -The prisoners were then rowed to the Moorish ship, which sailed for -Algiers. There they were landed and marched to the palace of the Dey, -or ruler of Algiers, while the people clapped their hands, shouted, and -gave thanks for the capture of so many "Christian dogs." They were put -in prison, where they found other Americans, and nearly six hundred -Christians of other countries, all of whom were treated as slaves. On -the next day each captive was loaded with chains, fastened around his -waist and joined to a ring about his ankle. They were then set to work -in rigging and fitting out ships, in blasting rocks in the mountains, or -carrying stones for the palace the Dey was building. Their lot was but -little better than that of the slaves of olden times who worked for the -Pharaohs. As more American sailors were captured and made slaves their -friends at home grew more and more eager to put an end to these pirates, -and when the Revolution was over the young Republic of the United States -began to heed the appeals for help that came from the slave-markets -along the Barbary coast. - -The Republic found, however, that so long as England and France were -paying tribute to the pirates it would be easier for her to do the -same thing than to fight them. The American Navy was very small, and -the Mediterranean was far distant. England seemed actually to be -encouraging the pirates, thinking that their attacks on American ships -would injure the country that had lately won its independence. So the -United States made the best terms it could with the rulers of Algiers, -Morocco, Tunis, and Tripoli, and paid heavy ransoms for the release of -the captives. There was little self-respect or honor among the Moorish -chiefs, however. One Dey succeeded another, each more greedy than the -last, and each demanded more tribute money or threatened to seize all -the Americans he could lay hands upon. The consuls had to be constantly -making presents in order to keep the Moors in a good humor, and whenever -the Dey felt the need of more money he would demand it of the United -States consul, and threaten to throw him in prison if he refused. - -This state of affairs was very unpleasant for free men, but for a number -of years it had to be put up with. When Captain Bainbridge dropped -anchor off Algiers in command of the United States frigate _George -Washington_, the Dey demanded that he should carry a Moorish envoy to -Constantinople with presents for the Sultan of Turkey. Bainbridge did -not like to be treated as a messenger boy; but the Dey said, "You pay -me tribute, by which you become my slaves. I have, therefore, a right -to order you as I may think proper." Bainbridge had no choice but to -obey the command, or leave American merchant vessels at the mercy of the -Moors, and so he carried the Dey's presents to the Sultan. - -As all the Barbary States throve on war, in that way gaining support -from the enemies of the country they attacked, one or the other was -constantly making war. In May, 1801, the Pasha of Tripoli declared -war against the United States, cut down the American flagstaff at -his capital, and sent out his pirate ships. In reply the United -States ordered a squadron of four vessels under command of Commodore -Richard Dale to sail to the Mediterranean. This squadron did good -service, capturing a number of the galleys of Tripoli, and exchanging -Moorish prisoners for American slaves. But the pirates were like a -swarm of hornets; they stung wherever they got a chance, and as soon -as the war-ships were out of sight they would steal out from their -hiding-places to terrorize the coast. The United States had to keep -sending squadrons to act as policemen. When the fleet kept together the -Moors had proper respect for them, but once the ships separated they -became the target for the hornets. - -The frigate _Philadelphia_, of thirty-six guns, was detailed in October, -1803, to blockade the port of Tripoli. The morning after she reached -there she saw a ship inshore preparing to sail westward. The frigate -gave chase, and as the other vessel carried the colors of Tripoli, the -frigate opened fire. As she chased the Moor the _Philadelphia_ ran on -a shelving rock that was part of a long reef. Her crew worked hard to -get her off, but she stuck fast. As the Moors on shore saw the plight of -the _Philadelphia_ they manned their boats, and soon she was surrounded -by a swarm of pirate galleys. The galleys sailed under the fire of -the frigate's heavy guns, and came up to close quarters, where the -cannon could not reach them. The Americans were helpless, and by sunset -Commodore Bainbridge had to strike his flag. As soon as he surrendered -the Moors swarmed over the sides of his ship, broke everything they -could lay their hands on, stripped officers and men of their uniforms, -and tumbled them into the small boats. The prisoners were landed at -night, and led to the castle gate. The sailors were treated as slaves, -but the officers were received by the Pasha in the great marble-paved -hall of his palace, where that ruler, dressed in silks and jewels, and -surrounded by a gorgeous court, asked them many questions, and later -offered them supper. But the favor of the Pasha was as fickle as the -wind; within a day or two he was treating the American officers much as -he treated his other Christian captives, and the crew, three hundred -and seven in number, were worked as slaves. Meantime the Moors, using -anchors and cables, succeeded in pulling the _Philadelphia_ off the -reef, and the frigate was pumped out and made seaworthy. She was brought -into the harbor, to the delight of the Pasha and his people at owning -so fine a war-ship. The loss of the _Philadelphia_ was a severe blow, -not only to American pride, but to American fortunes. The squadron -was now much too small for service, and Bainbridge and his crew were -hostages the United States must redeem. - -It fell to the lot of Commodore Preble to take charge of the American -ships in the Mediterranean, and he began to discuss terms of peace -with Tripoli through an agent of the Pasha at Malta. By these terms -the frigate _Philadelphia_ was to be exchanged for a schooner, and -the Moorish prisoners in Preble's hands, sixty in number, were to be -exchanged for as many of the American prisoners in Tripoli, and the rest -of the American captives were to be ransomed at five hundred dollars -a man. Before these terms were agreed upon, however, a more daring -plan occurred to the American commodore, and on February 3, 1804, he -entrusted a delicate task to Stephen Decatur, who commanded the schooner -_Enterprise_. Decatur picked a volunteer crew, put them on board the -ships _Siren_ and _Intrepid_, and sailed for Tripoli. They reached -that port on February 7th, and to avoid suspicion the _Intrepid_ drew -away from the other ship and anchored after dark about a mile west -of the town. A small boat with a pilot and midshipman was sent in to -reconnoiter the harbor. They reported that the sea was breaking across -the western entrance, and as the weather was threatening advised Decatur -not to try to enter that night. The two American ships therefore stood -offshore, and were driven far to the east by a gale. The weather was so -bad that it was not until February 16th that they returned to Tripoli. -This time the _Intrepid_ sailed slowly toward the town, while the -_Siren_, disguised as a merchantman, kept some distance in the rear. - -The frigate _Philadelphia_, now the Pasha's prize ship, lay at anchor in -the harbor, and the _Intrepid_ slowly drifted toward her in the light -of the new moon. No one on ship or shore realized the real purpose of -the slowly-moving _Intrepid_. Had the men at the forts on shore or the -watchman at the Pasha's castle suspected her purpose they could have -blown her from the water with their heavy guns. - -The _Intrepid_ drifted closer and closer, with her crew hidden, except -for six or eight men dressed as Maltese sailors. Decatur stood by the -pilot at the helm. When the little ship was about one hundred yards -from the _Philadelphia_ she was hailed and ordered to keep away. The -pilot answered that his boat had lost her anchor in the storm, and asked -permission to make fast to the frigate for the night. This was given, -and the Moorish officer on the _Philadelphia_ asked what the ship in -the distance was. The pilot said that she was the _Transfer_, a vessel -lately purchased at Malta by the Moors, which was expected at Tripoli -about that time. The pilot kept on talking in order to lull the Moors' -suspicions, and meantime the little _Intrepid_ came close under the port -bow of the _Philadelphia_. Just then the wind shifted and held the -schooner away from the frigate, and directly in range of her guns. Again -the Moors had a chance to destroy the American boat and crew if they had -known her real object. They did not suspect it, however. Each ship sent -out a small boat with a rope, and when the ropes were joined the two -ships were drawn close together. - -When the vessels were almost touching some one on the _Philadelphia_ -suddenly shouted, "Americanos!" At the same moment Decatur gave the -order "Board!" and the American crew sprang over the side of the frigate -and jumped to her deck. The Moors were huddled on the forecastle. -Decatur formed his men in line and charged. The surprised Moors made -little resistance, and Decatur quickly cleared the deck of them; some -jumped into the sea, and others escaped in a large boat. The Americans -saw that they could not get the _Philadelphia_ safely out of the harbor, -and so quickly brought combustibles from the _Intrepid_, and stowing -them about the _Philadelphia_, set her on fire. In a very few minutes -she was in flames, and the Americans jumped from her deck to their -own ship. It took less than twenty minutes to capture and fire the -_Philadelphia_. - -Decatur ordered his men to the oars, and the _Intrepid_ beat a retreat -from the harbor. But now the town of Tripoli was fully aroused. The -forts opened fire on the little schooner. A ship commanded the channel -through which she had to sail, but fortunately for the _Intrepid_ the -Moors' aim was poor, and the only shot that struck her was one through -the topgallantsail. The harbor was brightly lighted now. The flames had -run up the mast and rigging of the _Philadelphia_, and as they reached -the powder loud explosions echoed over the sea. Presently the cables of -the frigate burned, and the _Philadelphia_ drifted ashore and blew up. -In the meantime the _Intrepid_ reached the entrance safely, and joining -the _Siren_ set sail for Syracuse. - -The blowing up of the _Philadelphia_ was one of the most daring acts -ever attempted by the United States Navy, and won Decatur great credit. -It weakened the Pasha's strength, and kept his pirate crews in check. -Instead of making terms with the Moorish ruler, the United States -decided to attack his capital, and in the summer of 1804, Commodore -Preble collected his squadron before Tripoli. On August 3d the fleet -approached the land batteries, and in the afternoon began to throw -shells into the town. The Moors immediately opened fire, both from the -forts and from their fleet of nineteen gunboats and two galleys that lay -in the harbor. Preble divided his ships, and ordered them to close in -on the enemy's vessels, although the latter outnumbered them three to -one. Again Decatur was the hero of the fight. He and his men boarded a -Moorish gunboat and fought her crew hand-to-hand across the decks. He -captured the first vessel, and then boarded a second. Decatur singled -out the captain, a gigantic Moor, and made for him. The Moor thrust -at him with a pike, and Decatur's cutlass was broken off at the hilt. -Another thrust of the pike cut his arm, but the American seized the -weapon, tore it away, and threw himself on the Moor. The crews were -fighting all around their leaders, and a Moorish sailor aimed a blow -at Decatur's head with a scimitar. An American seaman struck the blow -aside, and the scimitar gashed his own scalp. The Moorish captain, -stronger than Decatur, got him underneath, and drawing a knife, was -about to kill him, when Decatur caught the Moor's arm with one hand, -thrust his other hand into his pocket, and fired his revolver. The Moor -was killed, and Decatur sprang to his feet. Soon after the enemy's -crew surrendered. The other United States ships had been almost as -successful, and the battle taught the Americans that the Barbary pirates -could be beaten in hand-to-hand fighting as well as at long range. - -[Illustration: DECATUR CAUGHT THE MOOR'S ARM] - -The Pasha was not ready to come to terms even after that day's defeat, -however, and on August 7th Commodore Preble ordered another attack. -Again the harbor shook under the guns of the fleet and the forts, and at -sunset Preble had to withdraw. To avoid further bloodshed the commodore -sent a flag of truce to the Pasha, and offered to pay eighty thousand -dollars for the ransom of the American prisoners, and to make him a -present of ten thousand dollars more. The Pasha, however, demanded -one hundred and fifty thousand dollars, and Preble was not willing to -pay that amount. So later in August he attacked Tripoli again. Each of -these bombardments did great damage to the city, but the forts were too -strong to be captured. The blockading fleet, however, held its position, -and on September 3d opened fire again in the last of its assaults. In -spite of the heavy firing the Pasha refused to pull down his flag. - -On the night of September 4th a volunteer crew took the little -_Intrepid_ into the harbor. She was filled with combustibles, and when -she was close to the Moorish ships the powder was to be fired by a fuse -that would give time for the crew to escape in a small boat. The night -was dark, and the fleet soon lost sight of this fire-ship. She took the -right course through the channel, but before she was near the Moors she -was seen and they opened fire on her. Then came a loud explosion, and -the _Intrepid_, with her crew, was blown into the air. No one knows -whether one of the enemy's shots or her own crew fired the powder. This -was the greatest disaster that befell the United States Navy during all -its warfare with the Barbary pirates. Soon after Commodore Preble sailed -for home, though most of his fleet were kept in the Mediterranean to -protect American sailing vessels. - -The government at Washington, tired with the long warfare in the -Mediterranean, soon afterward ordered the consul at Algiers, Tobias -Lear, to treat for peace with the Pasha. A bargain was finally struck. -One hundred Moors were exchanged for as many of the American captives, -and sixty thousand dollars were paid as ransom for the rest. June 4, -1805, the American sailors, who had been slaves for more than nineteen -months, were released from their chains and sent on board the war-ship -_Constitution_. The Pasha declared himself a friend of the United -States, and saluted its flag with twenty-one guns from his castle and -forts. - -In the Barbary States rulers followed one another in rapid succession. -He who was Dey or Pasha one week might be murdered by an enemy the next, -and that enemy on mounting the throne was always eager to get as much -plunder as he could. Treaties meant little to any of them, and so other -countries kept on paying them tribute for the sake of peace. - -The United States fell into the habit of buying peace with Algiers, -Tripoli, Morocco, and Tunis by gifts of merchandise or gold or costly -vessels. But the more that was given to them the more greedy these -Moorish rulers grew, and so it happened that from time to time they -sent out their pirates to board American ships in order to frighten the -young Republic into paying heavier tribute. Seven years later the second -chapter of our history with the Barbary pirates opened. - - -II - -The brig _Edwin_ of Salem, Massachusetts, was sailing under full canvas -through the Mediterranean Sea, bound out from Malta to Gibraltar, -on August 25, 1812. At her masthead she flew the Stars and Stripes. -The weather was favoring, the little brig making good speed, and the -Mediterranean offered no dangers to the skipper. Yet Captain George -Smith, and his crew of ten Yankee sailors, kept constantly looking -toward the south at some distant sails that had been steadily gaining on -them since dawn. Every stitch of sail on the _Edwin_ had been set, but -she was being overhauled, and at this rate would be caught long before -she could reach Gibraltar. - -Captain Smith and his men knew who manned those long, low, -rakish-looking frigates. But the _Edwin_ carried no cannon, and if -they could not out-sail the three ships to the south they must yield -peaceably, or be shot down on their deck. Hour after hour they watched, -and by sunset they could see the dark, swarthy faces of the leading -frigate's crew. Before night the _Edwin_ had been overhauled, boarded, -and the Yankee captain and sailors were in irons, prisoners about to be -sold into slavery. - -They had been captured by one of the pirate crews of the Dey of Algiers, -and when they were taken ashore by these buccaneers they were stood up -in the slave market and sold to Moors, or put to work in the shipyards. -Other Yankee crews had met with the same treatment. - -Now the United States had been paying its tribute regularly to the -pirates, but in the spring of 1812 the Dey of Algiers suddenly woke up -to the fact that the Americans had been measuring time by the sun while -the Moors figured it by the moon, and found that in consequence he had -been defrauded of almost a half-year's tribute money, or twenty-seven -thousand dollars. He sent an indignant message to Tobias Lear, the -American consul at Algiers, threatening all sorts of punishments, and -Mr. Lear, taking all things into account, decided it was best to pay -the sum claimed by the Dey. The United States sent the extra tribute -in the shape of merchandise by the sailing vessel _Alleghany_; but -the Dey was now in a very bad temper, and declared that the stores -were of poor quality, and ordered the consul to leave at once in the -_Alleghany_, as he would have no further dealings with a country that -tried to cheat him. At almost the same time he received a present from -England of two large ships filled with stores of war,--powder, shot, -anchors, and cables. He immediately sent out word to the buccaneers to -capture all the American ships they could, and sell the sailors in the -slave-markets. The Dey of Algiers appeared to have no fear of the United -States. - -The truth of the matter was that his Highness the Dey, and also the -Bey of Tunis, had been spoiled by England, who at this time told them -confidently that the United States Navy was about to be wiped from the -seas. English merchants assured them that they could treat Captain -Smith and other Yankee skippers exactly as they pleased, since Great -Britain had declared war on the United States, and the latter country -would find herself quite busy at home. Algiers and Tripoli and Tunis, -remembering their old grudge against the Americans, assured their -English friends that nothing would delight them so much as to rid the -Mediterranean of the Stars and Stripes. - -The pirates swept down on the brig _Edwin_, and laid hands on every -American they could find in the neighborhood. They stopped and boarded -a ship flying the Spanish flag, and took prisoner a Mr. Pollard, of -Virginia. Tripoli and Tunis permitted English cruisers to enter their -harbors, contrary to the rules of war, and recapture four English prizes -that had been sent to them by the American privateer _Abellino_. When -the United States offered to pay a ransom of three thousand dollars for -every American who was held as a prisoner the Dey replied that he meant -to capture a large number of them before he would consider any terms of -sale. - -Our country was young and poor, and our navy consisted of only seventeen -seaworthy ships, carrying less than four hundred and fifty cannon. -England was indeed "Mistress of the Seas," with a great war-fleet of -a thousand vessels, armed with almost twenty-eight thousand guns. No -wonder that the British consul at Algiers had told the Dey "the American -flag would be swept from the seas, the contemptible navy of the United -States annihilated, and its maritime arsenals reduced to a heap of -ruins." No wonder the Dey believed him. But as a matter of fact the -little David outfought the giant Goliath; on the Great Lakes and on the -high seas the Stars and Stripes waved triumphant after many a long and -desperate encounter, and the small navy came out of the War of 1812 with -a glorious record of victories, with splendid officers and crews, and -with sixty-four ships. The English friends of the Barbary States had -been mistaken, and Algiers, Tunis, and Tripoli began to wish they had -not been so scornful of the Yankees. - -It was time to show the pirates that Americans had as much right to -trade in the Mediterranean as other people. On February 23, 1815, -a few days after the treaty of peace with England was published, -President Madison advised that we should send a fleet to Algiers. Two -squadrons were ordered on this service, under command of Commodore -William Bainbridge. One collected at Boston, and the other at New York. -Commodore Stephen Decatur was in charge of the latter division. - -Decatur's squadron was the first to sail, leaving New York on May 20, -1815. He had ten vessels in all, his flag-ship being the forty-four-gun -frigate _Guerrière_, and his officers and crew being all seasoned -veterans of the war with England. The fleet of the Dey of Algiers, -however, was no mean foe. It consisted of twelve vessels, well armed -and manned, six sloops, five frigates, and one schooner. Its admiral -was a very remarkable man, one of the fierce tribe of Kabyles from the -mountains, Reis Hammida by name, who had made himself the scourge -of the Mediterranean. He had plenty of reckless courage; once he had -boarded and captured in broad daylight a Portuguese frigate under the -very cliffs of Gibraltar, and at another time, being in command of three -Algerine frigates, had dared to attack a Portuguese ship of the line -and three frigates, in face of the guns leveled at him from the Rock of -Lisbon, directly opposite. - -The city of Algiers itself was one of the best fortified ports on the -Mediterranean. It lay in the form of a triangle, one side extending -along the sea, while the other two rose against a hill, meeting at the -top at the Casbah, the historic fortress of the Deys. The city was -guarded by very thick walls, mounted with many guns, and the harbor, -made by a long mole, was commanded by heavy batteries, so that at least -five hundred pieces of cannon could be brought to bear on any hostile -ships trying to enter. - -Decatur's fleet was only a few days out of New York when it ran into a -heavy gale, and the wooden ships were badly tossed about. The _Firefly_, -a twelve-gun brig, sprung her masts, and had to put back to port. -The other ships rode out the storm, and kept on their course to the -Azores, keeping a sharp watch for any suspicious-looking craft. As they -neared the coast of Portugal the vigilance was redoubled, for here was -a favorite hunting-ground of Reis Hammida, and Decatur knew what the -Algerine admiral had done before the Rock of Lisbon. They found no -trace of the enemy here, however. At Cadiz Decatur sent a messenger -to the American consul, who informed him that three Algerine frigates -and some smaller ships had been spoken in the Atlantic Ocean, but were -thought to have returned to the Mediterranean. - -Decatur wanted to take the enemy by surprise, and so sailed cautiously -to Tangier, where he learned that two days earlier Reis Hammida had gone -through the Straits of Gibraltar in the forty-six-gun frigate _Mashuda_. -The American captain at once set sail for Gibraltar, and found out there -that the wily Algerine was lying off Cape Gata, having demanded that -Spain should pay him half a million dollars of tribute money to protect -her coast-towns from attack by his fleet. - -Lookouts on the _Guerrière_ reported to Decatur that a despatch-boat had -left Gibraltar as soon as the American ships appeared, and inquiry led -the captain to believe the boat was bearing messages to Reis Hammida. -Other boats were sailing for Algiers, and Decatur, realizing the ease -with which his wily opponent, thoroughly familiar with the inland sea, -would be able to elude him, decided to give chase at once. - -The fleet headed up the Mediterranean June 15th, under full sail. -The next evening ships were seen near shore, and Decatur ordered the -frigate _Macedonian_ and two brigs to overhaul them. Early the following -morning, when the fleet was about twenty miles out from Cape Gata, -Captain Gordon, of the frigate _Constellation_, sighted a big vessel -flying the flag of Algiers, and signaled "An enemy to the southeast." - -Decatur saw that the strange ship had a good start of his fleet, and was -within thirty hours' run of Algiers. He suspected that her captain might -not have detected the fleet as American, and ordered the _Constellation_ -back to her position abeam of his flag-ship, gave directions to try to -conceal the identity of his squadron, and stole up on the stranger. -The latter was seen to be a frigate, lying to under small sail, as if -waiting for some message from the African shore near at hand. One of the -commanders asked permission to give chase, but Decatur signaled back "Do -nothing to excite suspicion." - -The Moorish frigate held her position near shore while the American -ships drew closer. When they were about a mile distant a quartermaster -on the _Constellation_, by mistake, hoisted a United States flag. To -cover this blunder the other ships were immediately ordered to fly -English flags. But the crew of the Moorish frigate had seen the flag on -the _Constellation_, and instantly swarmed out on the yard-arms, and -had the sails set for flight. They were splendid seamen, and almost -immediately the frigate was leaping under all her canvas for Algiers. -The Americans were busy too. The rigging of each ship was filled with -sailors, working out on the yards, the decks rang with commands, and -messages were signaled from the flag-ship to the captains. Decatur -crowded on all sail, fearing that the Algerine frigate might escape him -in the night or seek refuge in some friendly harbor, and the American -squadron raced along at top speed, just as the Barbary pirates had -earlier chased after the little brig _Edwin_, of Salem. - -Soon the _Constellation_, which was to the south of the fleet and so -nearest to the Moorish frigate, opened fire and sent several shots -on board the enemy. The latter immediately came about, and headed -northeast, as if making for the port of Carthagena. The Americans also -tacked, and gained by this manoeuvre, the sloop _Ontario_ cutting across -the Moor's course, and the _Guerrière_ being brought close enough for -musketry fire. - -As the flag-ship came to close quarters the Moors opened fire, wounding -several men, but Decatur waited until his ship cleared the enemy's -yard-arms, when he ordered a broadside. The crew of the Algerine -frigate, which was the _Mashuda_, were mowed down by this heavy fire. -Reis Hammida himself had already been wounded by one of the first shots -from the _Constellation_. He had, however, insisted on continuing to -give orders from a couch on the quarter-deck, but a shot from the first -broadside killed him. The _Guerrière's_ gun crews loaded and fired again -before the first smoke had cleared; at this second broadside one of -her largest guns exploded, killing three men, wounding seventeen, and -splintering the spar-deck. - -The Moors made no sign of surrender, but Decatur, seeing that there were -too few left to fight, and not wishing to pour another broadside into -them, sailed past, and took a position just out of range. The Algerines -immediately tried to run before him. In doing this the big _Mashuda_ -was brought directly against the little eighteen-gun American brig -_Epervier_, commanded by John Downes. Instead of sailing away Downes -placed his brig under the Moor's cabin ports, and by backing and filling -escaped colliding with the frigate while he fired his small broadsides -at her. This running fire, lasting for twenty-five minutes, finished the -Moor's resistance, and the frigate surrendered. - -The flag-ship, the _Guerrière_, now took charge of the Algerine prize, -and Decatur sent an officer, two midshipmen, and a crew on board her. -The _Mashuda_ was a sorry sight, many of her men killed or wounded, and -her decks splintered by the American broadsides. The prisoners were -transferred to the other ships, and orders were given to the prize-crew -to take the captured frigate to the port of Carthagena, under escort of -the _Macedonian_. - -Before this was done, however, Decatur signaled all the officers to meet -on his flag-ship. In the cabin they found a table covered with captured -Moorish weapons,--daggers, pistols, scimitars, and yataghans. Decatur -turned to Commandant Downes, who had handled the small _Epervier_ so -skilfully. "As you were fortunate in obtaining a favorable position and -maintained it so handsomely, you shall have the first choice of these -weapons," he said. Downes chose, and then each of the other officers -selected a trophy of the victory. That evening the squadron, leaving -the _Mashuda_ in charge of the _Macedonian_, resumed its hunt for other -ships belonging to the navy of the piratical Dey. - -The fleet was arriving off Cape Palos on June 19th when a brig was seen, -looking suspiciously like an Algerine craft. When the Americans set sail -toward her, the stranger ran away. Soon she came to shoal water, and -the frigates had to leave the chase to the light-draught _Epervier_, -_Spark_, _Torch_, and _Spitfire_. These followed and opened fire. The -strange brig returned several shots, and was then run aground by her -crew on the coast between the watch-towers of Estacio and Albufera, -which had been built long before for the purpose of protecting fishermen -and peasants from the raids of pirates. The strangers took to their -small boats. One of these was sunk by a shot. The Americans then boarded -the ship, which was the Algerine twenty-two-gun brig _Estedio_, and -captured eighty-three prisoners. The brig was floated off the shoals and -sent with a prize-crew into the Spanish port of Carthagena. - -Decatur, being unable to sight any more ships that looked like Moorish -craft, and supposing that the rest of the pirate fleet would probably be -making for Algiers, gave commands to his squadron to sail for that port. -He was determined to bring the Dey to terms as quickly as possible, -and to destroy his fleet, or bombard the city, if that was necessary. -When he arrived off the Moorish town, however, he found none of the -fleet there, and no apparent preparation for war in the harbor. The next -morning he ran up the Swedish flag at the mainmast, and a white flag -at the foremast, a signal asking the Swedish consul to come on board -the flag-ship. Mr. Norderling, the consul, came out to the _Guerrière_, -accompanied by the Algerine captain of the port. After some conversation -Decatur asked the latter for news of the Dey's fleet. "By this time it -is safe in some neutral port," was the assured answer. - -"Not all of it," said Decatur, "for we have captured the _Mashuda_ and -the _Estedio_." - -The Algerine could not believe this, and told the American so. Then -Decatur sent for a wounded lieutenant of the _Mashuda_, who was on his -ship, and bade him confirm the statement. The Moorish officer of the -port immediately changed his tactics, dropped his haughty attitude, and -gave Decatur to understand that he thought the Dey would be willing to -make a new treaty of peace with the United States. - -Decatur handed the Moor a letter from the President to the Dey, which -stated that the Republic would only agree to peace provided Algiers -would give up her claim to tribute and would cease molesting American -merchantmen. - -The Moor wanted to gain as much time as possible, hoping his fleet -would arrive, and said that it was the custom to discuss all treaties in -the palace on shore. Decatur understood the slow and crafty methods of -these people, and answered that the treaty should be drawn up and signed -on board the _Guerrière_ or not at all. Seeing that there was no use in -arguing with the American the Moorish officer went ashore to consult -with the Dey. - -Next day, June 30th, the captain of the port returned, with power to act -for his Highness Omar Pasha. Decatur told him that he meant to put an -end to these piratical attacks on Americans, and insisted that all his -countrymen who were being held as slaves in Algiers should be given up, -that the value of goods taken from them should be paid them, that the -Dey should give the owners of the brig _Edwin_ of Salem ten thousand -dollars, that all Christians who escaped from Algiers to American ships -should be free, and that the two nations should act toward each other -exactly as other civilized countries did. Then the Moorish officer began -to explain and argue. He said that it was not the present ruling Dey, -Omar Pasha, called "Omar the Terrible" because of his great courage, -who had attacked American ships; it was Hadji Ali, who was called the -"Tiger" because of his cruelty, but he had been assassinated in March, -and his prime minister, who succeeded him, had been killed the following -month, and Omar Pasha was a friend of the United States. Decatur replied -that his terms for peace could not be altered. - -The Moor then asked for a truce while he should go ashore and confer -with the Dey. Decatur said he would grant no truce. The Algerine -besought him to make no attack for three hours. "Not a minute!" answered -Decatur. "If your squadron appears before the treaty is actually signed -by the Dey, and before the American prisoners are sent aboard, I will -capture it!" - -The Moorish captain said he would hurry at once to the Dey, and added -that if the Americans should see his boat heading out to the _Guerrière_ -with a white flag in the bow they would know that Omar Pasha had agreed -to Decatur's terms. - -An hour later the Americans sighted an Algerine war-ship coming from the -east. Decatur signaled his fleet to clear for action, and gave orders -to his own men on the _Guerrière_. The fleet had hardly weighed anchor, -however, before the small boat of the port captain was seen dashing out -from shore, a white flag in the bow. The excited Moor waved to the crew -of the flag-ship. As soon as the boat was near enough Decatur asked -if the Dey had signed the treaty, and set the American captives free. -The captain assured him of this, and a few minutes later his boat was -alongside the flag-ship, and the Americans, who had been seized and held -by the pirates, were given over to their countrymen. Some of them had -been slaves for several years, and their delight knew no bounds. - -In so short a time did Decatur succeed in bringing the Dey to better -terms than he had made with any other country. When the treaty had -been signed the Dey's prime minister said to the English consul, with -reproach in his voice, "You told us that the Americans would be swept -from the seas in six months by your navy, and now they make war upon us -with some of your own vessels which they have taken." As a fact three of -the ships in Decatur's squadron had actually been won from the English -in the War of 1812. - -The _Epervier_, commanded by Lieutenant John Templer Shubrick, was now -ordered to return to the United States, with some of the Americans -rescued from Algiers. The fate of the brig is one of the mysteries of -the sea. She sailed through the Straits of Gibraltar July 12, 1815, and -was never heard of again. She is supposed to have been lost in a heavy -storm in which a number of English merchantmen foundered near the West -Indies. - -Algiers had now been brought to her knees by Decatur, and he was free -to turn to Tunis and Tripoli. The rulers of each of these countries had -been misled by the English agents exactly as had the Dey of Algiers, and -the Bey of Tunis had allowed the British cruiser _Lyra_ to recapture -some English prizes that the American privateer _Abellino_ had taken -into harbor during the War of 1812. Like Algiers, both Tunis and Tripoli -were well protected by fleets and imposing forts. Decatur, however, -had now learned that downright and prompt measures were the ones most -successful in dealing with the Moors, who were used to long delays and -arguments. He anchored off Tunis on July 26th, and immediately sent word -to the Bey that the latter must pay the United States forty-six thousand -dollars for allowing the English _Lyra_ to seize the American prizes, -and that the money must be paid within twelve hours. - -The United States consul, Mordecai M. Noah, carried Decatur's message -to the Bey. The Moorish ruler was seated on a pile of cushions at -a window of his palace, combing his long, flowing black beard with -a tortoise-shell comb set with diamonds. Mr. Noah politely stated -Decatur's terms. - -"Tell your admiral to come and see me," said the Bey. - -"He declines coming, your Highness," answered the consul, "until these -disputes are settled, which are best done on board the ship." - -The Bey frowned. "But this is not treating me with becoming dignity. -Hammuda Pasha, of blessed memory, commanded them to land and wait at the -palace until he was pleased to receive them." - -"Very likely, your Highness," said Mr. Noah, "but that was twenty years -ago." - -The Bey considered. "I know this admiral," he remarked at length; "he is -the same one who, in the war with Sidi Yusuf, burned the frigate." He -referred to Decatur's burning the _Philadelphia_ in the earlier warfare. - -The consul nodded. "The same." - -"Hum!" said the Bey. "Why do they send wild young men to treat for peace -with old powers? Then, you Americans do not speak the truth. You went -to war with England, a nation with a great fleet, and said you took her -frigates in equal fight. Honest people always speak the truth." - -"Well, sir, and that was true. Do you see that tall ship in the bay -flying a blue flag?" The consul pointed through the window. "It is the -_Guerrière_, taken from the British. That one near the small island, the -_Macedonian_, was also captured by Decatur on equal terms. The sloop -near Cape Carthage, the _Peacock_, was also taken in battle." - -The Bey, looking through his telescope, saw a small vessel leave the -American fleet and approach the forts. A man appeared to be taking -soundings. The Bey laid down the telescope. "I will accept the admiral's -terms," said he, and resumed the combing of his beard. - -Later he received Decatur with a great show of respect. The American -consul was also honored, but the British was not treated so well. When -a brother of the prime minister paid the money over to Decatur the Moor -turned to the Englishman, and said, "You see, sir, what Tunis is obliged -to pay for your insolence. You should feel ashamed of the disgrace you -have brought upon us. I ask you if you think it just, first to violate -our neutrality and then to leave us to be destroyed or pay for your -aggressions?" - -Having settled matters with Tunis, Decatur sailed for Tripoli, and -there sent his demands to the Pasha. He asked thirty thousand dollars -in payment for two American prizes of war that had been recaptured by -the British cruiser _Paulina_, a salute of thirty-one guns to be fired -from the Pasha's palace in honor of the United States flag, and that the -treaty of peace be signed on board the _Guerrière_. - -The Pasha pretended to be offended, summoned his twenty thousand Arab -soldiers and manned his cannon; but when he heard how Algiers and Tunis -had already made peace with Decatur, and saw that the Americans were -all prepared for battle, he changed his tactics and sent the governor -of Tripoli to the flag-ship to treat for peace. The American consul -told Decatur that twenty-five thousand dollars would make good the lost -prize-ships, but that the Pasha was holding ten Christians as slaves in -Tripoli. Decatur thereupon reduced the amount of his claim on condition -that the slaves should be released. This was agreed to. The prisoners, -two of whom were Danes, and the others Sicilians, were sent to the -flag-ship, and by way of compliment the band of the _Guerrière_ went -ashore and played American airs to the delight of the people. - -The American captain now ordered the rest of his squadron to sail to -Gibraltar, while the _Guerrière_ landed the prisoners at Sicily. As the -flag-ship came down the coast from Carthagena she met that part of the -Algerine fleet that had put into Malta when the Americans first arrived -in the Mediterranean. The _Guerrière_ was alone, and Decatur thought -that the Moors, finding him at such a disadvantage, might break their -treaty of peace, and attack him. He called his men to the quarter-deck. -"My lads," said he, "those fellows are approaching us in a threatening -manner. We have whipped them into a treaty, and if the treaty is to be -broken let them break it. Be careful of yourselves. Let any man fire -without orders at the peril of his life. But let them fire first if they -will, and we'll take the whole of them!" - -The decks were cleared, and every man stood ready for action. The fleet -of seven Algerine ships sailed close to the single American frigate in -line of battle. The crews looked across the bulwarks at each other, but -not a word was said until the last Algerine ship was opposite. "Where -are you going?" demanded the Moorish admiral. - -"Wherever it pleases me," answered Decatur; and the _Guerrière_ sailed -on her course. - -Early in October there was a great gathering of American ships -at Gibraltar. Captain Bainbridge's fleet, which included the -seventy-four-gun ship of the line _Independence_, was there when Decatur -arrived. The war between the United States and England was only recently -ended, and the presence of so many ships of the young Republic at the -English Rock of Gibraltar caused much talk among the Spaniards and other -foreigners. The sight of ships which had been English, but which were -now American, added to the awkward situation, and more than one duel was -fought on the Rock as the result of disputes over the War of 1812. - -The Dey of Algiers, left to his own advisers and to the whispers of men -who were jealous of the United States' success, began to wish he had not -agreed to the treaty he had made with Decatur. His own people told him -that a true son of the Prophet should never have humbled himself before -the Christian dogs. In addition the English government agreed to pay him -nearly four hundred thousand dollars to ransom twelve thousand prisoners -of Naples and Sardinia that he was holding. Before everything else the -Dey was greedy. Therefore when Captain Oliver Hazard Perry, the hero of -the battle of Lake Erie, brought out in the _Java_ a copy of the treaty -after it had been ratified by the United States Senate, and it was -presented to the Dey by the American consul, William Shaler, the ruler -of Algiers pretended that the United States had changed the treaty, -and complained of the way in which Decatur had dealt with the Algerine -ships. Next day he refused to meet Mr. Shaler again, and sent the treaty -back to him, saying that the Americans were unworthy of his confidence. -Mr. Shaler hauled down the flag at his consulate, and boarded the _Java_. - -Fortunately there were five American ships near Algiers; and these -were made ready to open fire on the Moorish vessels in the harbor. -Plans were also made for a night attack. The small boats of the fleet -were divided into two squadrons, to be filled by twelve hundred -volunteer sailors. One division was to make for the water battery and -try to spike its guns, while the other was to attack the batteries -on shore. Scaling-ladders were ready, and the men were provided with -boarding-spikes; but shortly before they were to embark the captain -of a French ship in the harbor got word of the plan and carried the -information to the Dey. The latter was well frightened, and immediately -sent word that he would do whatever his good friends from America -wanted. The next day Mr. Shaler landed again, and the Dey signed the -treaty. - -The fleet then called a second time on the Bey of Tunis, who had been -grumbling about his dissatisfaction with Decatur's treatment. He -too, however, was most friendly when American war-ships poked their -noses toward his palace. After that the Barbary pirates let American -merchantmen trade in peace, although an American squadron of four ships -was kept in the Mediterranean to see that the Dey, and the Bey, and the -Pasha did not forget, and go back to their old tricks. - -So it was that Decatur put an end to the African pirates, so far as the -United States was concerned, and taught them that sailors of the young -Republic, far away though it was, were not to be made slaves by greedy -Moorish rulers. - - - - -V - -THE FATE OF LOVEJOY'S PRINTING-PRESS - - -Ever since the thirteen colonies that lay along the Atlantic coast -had become a nation ambitious men had heard the call, "Go West, -young man, go West!" There was plenty of fertile land in the country -beyond the Alleghany Mountains, and it was free to any who would -settle on it. Adventure beckoned men to come and help in founding new -states, and many, who thought the villages of New England already -overcrowded, betook themselves to the inviting West. One such youth was -Elijah Parrish Lovejoy, who came from the little town of Albion, in -Maine, and who, after graduating at Waterville College, had become a -school-teacher. This did not satisfy him; he wanted to see more of the -world than lay in the village of his birth, and when he was twenty-five -years old, in May, 1827, he set out westward. - -The young man was a true son of the Puritans, brought up to believe -in many ideas that were already often in conflict with the views of -men of the South and West. He reached the small city of St. Louis, in -the pioneer country of Missouri, and there he found a chance to teach -school. He wrote for several newspapers that were being started, and in -the course of the next year edited a political paper that was urging -the election of Henry Clay as President. His interest in politics grew, -and he might have sought some public office himself had he not suddenly -become convinced that he was meant to be a minister, and determined to -prepare for that work at Princeton Seminary. When he returned to St. -Louis in 1833 his friends helped him to found a weekly religious paper -called the _St. Louis Observer_. - -The editor found time from his newspaper work to ride into the country -and preach at the small churches that were springing up at every -crossroads. Missouri was more southern than northern, and he saw much -of slave-owning people. It was not long before he decided that negro -slavery was wrong, and that the only way to right the wrong was to do -away with it altogether. He began to attack slavery in his newspaper and -in his sermons, and soon slavery men in that part of Missouri came to -consider him as one of their most bitter foes. - -Lovejoy had married, and expected to make St. Louis his permanent -home. But neither all the men who were interested in the _Observer_, -nor all the members of his church, approved of his arguments against -slaveholding, and when he was away at a religious meeting the -proprietors of his paper issued a statement promising that the editor -would deal more gently with the question of slavery in the future. When -Lovejoy returned and read this statement he was indignant; he was not a -man to fear public opinion, and he attacked his enemies more ardently -than ever. - -The law of the land permitted slavery, and many of the chief citizens -in the frontier country approved of it. They hated the Abolitionists, -as those who wanted to do away with slavery were called. When men were -suspected of having helped to free slaves, or of sheltering runaway -negroes, they were taken into the country and given two hundred lashes -with a whip as a lesson. Sometimes Abolitionists were tarred and -feathered and ridden out of town; often their houses were burned and -their property destroyed. Lovejoy knew that he might have to face all -this, but the spirit of the Puritan stock from which he sprang would not -let him turn from his course. - -He went on printing articles against the evils of slavery, he denounced -the right of a white man to separate colored husbands and wives, parents -and children, brothers and sisters, or to send his slaves to the market -to be sold to the highest bidder, or to whip or ill-use them as if they -had no feelings. - -There was danger that the young editor would be mobbed, and the owners -of the _Observer_ took the paper out of his charge. Friends, however, -who believed in a free press, bought it, and gave it back to him. Waves -of public opinion, now for Lovejoy, now against him, swept through St. -Louis. By the end of 1835 mobs had attacked Abolitionists in Boston, -New York, and Philadelphia, and the news fanned the flames of resentment -against them in Missouri. - -Lovejoy had good reason to know the danger of his position. One -September day he went out to a camp-meeting at the little town of -Potosi. He learned that two men had waited half a day in the village, -planning to tar and feather him when he arrived, but he was late, and -they had left. When he returned to St. Louis he found that handbills had -been distributed through the city, calling on the people to tear down -the office of the _Observer_. A newspaper named the _Missouri Argus_ -urged patriotic men to mob the New England editor. Crowds, gathered on -street corners, turned dark, lowering looks upon him as he passed, and -every mail brought him threatening letters. He would not, however, stop -either writing or preaching against slavery. - -His work constantly called him on journeys to small towns, sometimes -several days' ride from his home. Late in 1835 he was at a meeting in -Marion when reports came that St. Louis was in an uproar, that men who -opposed slavery were being whipped in the streets, and that no one -suspected of being an Abolitionist would be allowed to stay there. -Lovejoy had left his wife ill in bed. He started to ride back, a friend -going some seventy miles with him, half of the journey. The friend urged -him not to stay in St. Louis, pointing out that his young and delicate -wife would have to suffer as well as he. Travelers they met all warned -him that he would not be safe in the city. He rode on to St. Charles, -where he had left his wife. He talked with her, and she told him to go -on to his newspaper office if he thought duty called him there. - -St. Louis was all excitement and alarm. The newspapers had attacked -the _Observer_ so bitterly that the owners had stopped printing it. A -mob had planned to wreck the office, but had postponed the task for a -few days. Men went to Lovejoy and told him he would not be safe in the -streets by day or night. Even the men of his church would not stand -by him, and a religious paper declared "that they would soon free the -church of the rotten sheep in it," by which they meant Elijah Lovejoy -and others who opposed slavery. - -This Yankee, however, like many others who had gone to that border -country in the days when bitterness ran high, had a heroic sense of -duty. He wrote and printed a letter to the people, stating that men had -no right to own their brothers, no matter what the law might say. The -letter caused more excitement than ever. - -The owners of the _Observer_ went to Lovejoy and requested him to retire -as its editor. For two days it was a question what the angry mobs would -do to him. Then a little better feeling set in. Men came to him, and -told him that he must go on printing his paper or there would be no -voice of freedom in all that part of the country. A friend bought -the newspaper from its owners, and urged Lovejoy to write as boldly -as before. This friend, however, suggested that he should move the -newspaper across the state line to Alton, Illinois, where feeling was -not so intense. Lovejoy agreed, and set out for Alton; but while he was -preparing to issue the paper there the same friend and others wrote him -that his pen was so much needed in St. Louis that he must come back. He -did so, and the _Observer_ continued its existence in St. Louis until -June, 1836. - -There was so much strife and ill feeling, however, in Missouri that -the editor decided his newspaper would be better supported, and would -exert more influence, in Illinois. Accordingly he arranged to move -his printing-press to the town of Alton in July. Just before he left -St. Louis he published severe criticisms of a judge of that city who -had sided with slave-owners, and these articles roused even greater -resentment among the rabble who hated Lovejoy's freedom of speech. - -If some of the people of Alton were glad to have this fearless editor -come to their town, many were not. Slavery was too sore a subject for -them to wish it talked about publicly. Many people all through that -part of the country looked upon an Abolitionist as a man who delighted -in stirring up ill feeling. Lovejoy sent his printing-press to Alton by -steamboat, and it was delivered at the wharf on a Sunday morning, about -daybreak. The steamboat company had agreed to land the press on Monday, -and Lovejoy refused to move it from the dock on the Sabbath. Early -Monday morning five or six men went down to the river bank and destroyed -the printing-press. - -This was the young editor's welcome by the lawless element, but next day -the better class of citizens, thoroughly ashamed of the outrage, met and -pledged themselves to repay Lovejoy for the loss of his press. These -people denounced the act of the mob, but at the same time they expressed -their disapproval of Abolitionists. They wanted order and quiet, and -hoped that Lovejoy would not stir up more trouble. - -The editor bought a new press and issued his first paper in Alton -on September 8, 1836. Many people subscribed to it, and it appeared -regularly until the following August. Lovejoy, however, would speak -his mind, and again and again declared that he was absolutely opposed -to slavery, and that the evil custom must come to an end. This led to -murmurs from the slavery party, and slanders were spread concerning the -editor's character. All freedom-loving men had to weather such storms -in those days, and Lovejoy, like a great many others, stuck to his -principles at a heavy cost. - -The murmurs and slanders grew. On July 8, 1837, posters announced -that a meeting would be held at the Market House to protest against -the articles in the _Alton Observer_. The meeting condemned Lovejoy's -writings and speeches, and voted that Abolitionism must be suppressed -in the town. This was the early thunder that heralded the approach of a -gathering storm. - -The Yankee editor showed no intention of giving up his stand against -slavery, but preached and wrote against it at every opportunity. As a -result threats of destroying the press of the _Observer_ were heard on -the streets of Alton, and newspapers in neighboring cities encouraged -ill feeling against the editor. The _Missouri Republic_, a paper printed -in St. Louis, tried to convince the people of Alton that it was a -public danger to have such men as Lovejoy in their midst, and condemned -the Anti-Slavery Societies that were being formed in that part of the -country. Two attempts were made to break into his printing-office during -the early part of the summer, but each time the attackers were driven -off by Lovejoy's friends. - -The editor went to a friend's house to perform a marriage ceremony -on the evening of August 21, 1837. His wife and little boy were ill -at home, and on his return he stopped at an apothecary's to get some -medicine for them. His house was about a half mile out of town. As -he left the main street he met a crowd of men and boys. They did not -recognize him at once, and he hurried past them; but soon some began -to suspect who he was, and shouted his name to the rest. Those in the -rear urged the leaders to attack him, but those in front held back; some -began to throw sticks and stones at him, and one, armed with a club, -pushed up to him, denouncing him for being an Abolitionist. At last a -number linked arms and pushed past him, and then turning about in the -road stopped him. There were cries of "Tar and feather him," "Ride him -on a rail," and other threats. Lovejoy told them they might do as they -pleased with him, but he had a request to make; his wife was ill, and he -wanted some one to take the medicine to her without alarming her. One of -the men volunteered to do this. Then the editor, standing at bay, argued -with them. "You had better let me go home," he said; "you have no right -to detain me; I have never injured you." There was more denouncing, -jostling and shoving, but the leaders, after a short talk, allowed -Lovejoy to go on toward his house. - -Meantime, however, another band had gone to the newspaper office between -ten and eleven o'clock, and, seeing by the lights in the building that -men were still at work there, had begun to throw stones at the windows. -A crowd gathered to watch the attack. The mayor and some of the leading -citizens hurried to the building, and argued with the ringleaders. A -prominent merchant told them that if they would wait until the next -morning he would break into the newspaper office with them, and help -them take out the press and the other articles, stow them on a boat, -put the editor on top, and send them all down the Mississippi River -together. But the crowd did not want to wait. The stones began to strike -some of Lovejoy's assistants inside the building, and they ran out by -a rear door. As soon as the office was empty the leaders rushed in and -broke the printing-press, type, and everything else in the building. -Next morning the slavery men in Alton said that the Abolitionist had -been silenced for the time, at least. They looked upon Lovejoy, and men -of his kind, as a thorn in the flesh of their peaceful community. - -There were still a small number of "freedom-loving" people in Alton, -however, and these stood back of Elijah Lovejoy. Although two -printing-presses had now been destroyed, these men called a meeting -and decided that the _Observer_ must continue to be printed. Money was -promised, and the editor prepared to set up his press for the third -time. He issued a short note to the public, in which he said: "I now -appeal to you, and all the friends of law and order, to come to the -rescue. If you will sustain me, by the help of God, the press shall be -again established at this place, and shall be sustained, come what will. -Let the experiment be fairly tried, whether the liberty of speech and of -the press is to be enjoyed in Illinois or not." The money was raised, -and the dauntless spokesman for freedom sent to Cincinnati for supplies -for his new office. - -That autumn enemies scattered pamphlets accusing Lovejoy and other -Abolitionists of various crimes against the country. Although few -people believed them, the circulars increased the hostile feelings, and -disturbed many of the editor's friends. Some of the latter began to -doubt whether the _Observer_ ought to continue its stirring articles. -Some thought it should be only a religious paper. But Lovejoy answered -that he felt it was his duty to speak out in protest against the great -evil of slavery. He finally offered to resign, if the supporters of -the paper thought it best for him to do so. They could not come to any -decision, and so let him continue his course. - -The third printing-press arrived at Alton on September 21st, while -Lovejoy was away attending a church meeting. The press was landed from -the steamboat a little after sunset, and was protected by a number of -friends of the _Observer_. It was carted to a large warehouse to be -stored. As it passed through the street some men cried, "There goes -the Abolition press; stop it, stop it!" but no one tried to injure it. -The mayor of Alton declared that the press should be protected, and -placed a constable at the door of the warehouse, with orders to remain -till a certain hour. As soon as this man left, ten or twelve others, -with handkerchiefs tied over their faces as disguise, broke into the -warehouse, rolled the press across the street to the river, broke it -into pieces, and threw it into the Mississippi. The mayor arrived and -protested, but the men paid no attention to him. - -Lovejoy's business had called him to the town of St. Charles, near St. -Louis, and he preached there while his third press was being attacked. -After his sermon in the evening he was sitting chatting with a clergyman -and another friend when a young man came in, and slipped a note into -his hand. The note read: - - "MR. LOVEJOY: - - "Be watchful as you come from church to-night. - - A FRIEND." - -Lovejoy showed the note to the two other men, and the clergyman invited -him to stay at his house. The editor declined, however, and walked to -his mother-in-law's residence with his two friends. No one stopped them, -and when they came to the house Lovejoy and the clergyman went in, and -sat down to chat in a room on the second floor. About ten o'clock they -heard a knock on the door at the foot of the stairs. Mrs. Lovejoy's -mother went to the door, and asked what was wanted. Voices answered, -"We want to see Mr. Lovejoy; is he in?" The editor called down, "Yes, I -am here." As soon as the door was opened, two men rushed up-stairs, and -into the sitting-room. They ordered Lovejoy to go down-stairs, and when -he resisted, struck him with their fists. Mrs. Lovejoy heard the noise, -and came running from her room. A crowd now filled the hall, and she had -to fight her way through them. Several men tried to drag the editor out -of the house, but his wife clung to him, and aided by her mother and -sister finally persuaded the assailants to leave. - -Exhausted by the struggle, Mrs. Lovejoy fainted. While her husband -was trying to help her, the mob came back, and, paying no attention to -the sick woman, insisted that they were going to ride Lovejoy out of -town. By this time a few respectable citizens had heard the noise, and -came to his aid. A second time the rabble was driven away; but they -stayed in the yard, and made the night hideous with their threats to -the Abolitionist. Presently some of the men went up to Lovejoy's room -the third time, and one of them gave him a note, which demanded that he -leave St. Charles by ten o'clock the next morning. Lovejoy's friends -begged him to send out an answer promising that he would leave. Although -he at first declined to do this, he finally yielded to their urging. He -wrote, "I have already taken my passage in the stage, to leave to-morrow -morning, at least by nine o'clock." This note was carried out to the -crowd on the lawn, and read to them. His friends thought the mob would -scatter after that, and they did for a time; but after listening to -violent speeches returned again. The noise was now so threatening that -Lovejoy's friends begged him to fly from the house. His wife added her -pleadings to theirs, and at last he stole out unnoticed by a door at the -rear. He hated to leave his wife in such a dangerous situation, however, -and so, after waiting a short time, he went back. His friends reproached -him for returning, and their reproaches were justified, for, like hounds -scenting the fox, the mob menaced the house more noisily than ever. -Lovejoy saw that he must leave again in order to protect his wife and -friends. This he succeeded in doing, and walked about a mile to the -residence of a Major Sibley. This friend lent him a horse, and he rode -out of town to the house of another friend four miles away. Next day -Mrs. Lovejoy joined him, and they went on together to Alton. - -One of the very first people they met in Alton was a man from St Charles -who had been among those who had broken into their house the night -before. Mrs. Lovejoy was alarmed at seeing him in Illinois, because the -mob in St. Charles had declared that they were going to drive Lovejoy -out of that part of the country. In order to quiet her fears her husband -asked some friends to come to his house, and ten men, well armed, spent -the next night guarding it, while he himself kept a loaded musket at his -side. The storm-clouds were gathering about his devoted head. - -Even the leading citizens of this Illinois town now felt that it was -Lovejoy's own fault if his newspaper was attacked. They hated mobs, but -most of them hated Abolitionists even more. If he would stop attacking -slavery, the crowds would stop attacking him. It was evident that -the lawless element did not intend to let him continue to print his -newspaper, and it was almost as clear that the mayor and authorities -were not going to protect him. Three times now his press had been -destroyed. - -This son of the Puritans was not to be driven from his purpose by -threats or blows, but he was forced to see that it was a great waste -of money to have one press after another thrown into the Mississippi -River. His friends in the town of Quincy urged him to set up his press -there, and he felt much inclined to do so. He decided to wait, however, -until the next meeting of the Presbyterian Synod, when he would learn -whether the men of his church sided with him or not. This meeting -ended in discussion, breaking up along the old lines of those who were -friends and those who were enemies of slavery. Some of the members had -already joined Anti-Slavery Societies, while others, although they were -opposed to mob-violence, did not approve of the newspaper's attack on -slaveholding citizens. In a stirring speech Lovejoy said that they were -to decide whether the press should be free in that part of the United -States. He ended with an appeal for justice. "I have no personal fears," -he declared. "Not that I feel able to contest the matter with the whole -community. I know perfectly well I am not. I know, sir, that you can -tar and feather me, hang me up, or put me into the Mississippi, without -the least difficulty. But what then? Where shall I go? I have been made -to feel that if I am not safe at Alton, I shall not be safe anywhere. -I recently visited St. Charles to bring home my family, and was torn -from their frantic embrace by a mob. I have been beset night and day at -Alton. And now if I leave here and go elsewhere, violence may overtake -me in my retreat, and I have no more claim upon the protection of any -other community than I have upon this; and I have concluded, after -consultation with my friends, and earnestly seeking counsel of God, to -remain at Alton, and here to insist on protection in the exercise of my -rights." - -This speech made a great impression upon its hearers. The words were -those of a man who had thought long upon his subject, and had made up -his mind as to what he should do. He expressed no enmity toward the men -who had treated him so ill, and he did not complain of the members of -his own church who were lukewarm in their support. A man who was present -said that Lovejoy's speech reminded him of the words of St. Paul when -brought before Festus, or of Martin Luther speaking to the council at -Worms. - -Having decided to stay, Lovejoy ordered his fourth printing-press. This -was due to arrive early in November, and as the time drew near there -was no little excitement and anxiety among the friends of peace in the -town. Whenever the puff of a steamboat was heard men hurried to the -banks of the Mississippi. Some meant to defend the press from attack; -others meant to hurl it into the river as they had already done with -its predecessors. The press had an eventful journey. The first plan was -to land it at a place called Chippewa, about five miles down the river, -and then carry it secretly into Alton. But the roads grew bad, and -this plan was abandoned. The press reached St. Louis on Sunday night, -November 5th, and it was arranged that the steamer should land it at -Alton about three o'clock Tuesday morning. As soon as this was known, -Lovejoy and his friend Gilman went to the mayor and told him of the -threat that had been made to destroy the press, asking him to appoint -special constables to protect it. The town council voted that Lovejoy -and his friends be requested not to persist in setting up an Abolition -press in Alton, but the mayor refused to sign this request. - -Monday night forty or fifty citizens, intent on seeing that the press -was protected, gathered at the warehouse of Godfrey, Gilman and Company -where the press was to be stored. Some thirty of them formed a volunteer -company, with one of the city constables in command. They were armed -with rifles and muskets loaded with buckshot or small balls. The editor -of the _Observer_ was not there. Only a night or two before his house -had been attacked, and his sister had narrowly escaped serious injury. -So he arranged with a brother, who was staying with him, to take turns -standing guard at his house and at the office. - -At three o'clock the steamboat arrived at the dock. Lovejoy's enemies -had stationed sentinels along the river, and as the boat passed they -gave the alarm by blowing horns, so that when the dock was reached a -large crowd had gathered. Some one called the mayor, and he came down -to the warehouse. He begged the volunteer company to keep quiet, and -said he himself would see to the safe storing of the press. No serious -trouble followed. The crowd watched the stevedores carry the press to -the warehouse, but did not attack it, except to throw a few stones. It -was stood in the garret of the stone warehouse, safe from the enemy. - -On Tuesday every one knew that the "Abolition press" had arrived, and -Tuesday night the same volunteers went down to the warehouse again. -Everything was quiet, and by nine o'clock all but about a dozen left the -place. Lovejoy stayed by the press, it being his brother's turn to guard -his house. The warehouse stood high above the river, apart from other -buildings, with considerable open space on the sides to the river and to -the north. - -About ten o'clock that night loafers and stragglers began to come -from saloons and restaurants, and gather in the streets that led to -the warehouse. Some thirty, armed with muskets, pistols, and stones, -marched to the door, and demanded admittance. Mr. Gilman, one of the -owners of the warehouse, standing at the garret door, asked what they -wanted. The leader answered, "The press." Mr. Gilman said that he would -not give up the press. "We have no ill feelings toward any of you," he -added, "and should regret to harm you; but we are authorized by the -mayor to defend our property, and shall do so with our lives." The -mob leader answered that they meant to have the press at any cost, -and leveled a pistol at Mr. Gilman, who drew back from the door. The -crowd began to throw stones, and broke a number of windows. Then they -fired through the windows. The men inside returned the shots. One or -two of the mob were wounded; and this checked them for a time. Soon, -however, others came with ladders, and materials for setting fire to -the roof of the building. They kept on the side of the warehouse where -there were no windows, and where they could not be driven away by the -defenders. It was a moonlight night, and the small company inside the -building did not dare go out into the open space in front. At this -point the mayor appeared and carried a flag of truce through the mob to -Lovejoy's friends, asking that the press be given up, and the men in -the warehouse depart peacefully without other property being destroyed. -He told them that unless they surrendered the mob would set fire to -the warehouse. They answered that they had gathered to defend their -property, and intended to do it. He admitted that they had a perfect -right to do this, and went back to report the result of his mission to -the leaders. Outside a shout went up, "Fire the building, drive out the -Abolitionists, burn them out!" A great crowd had gathered, but there -were no officers of the law ready to defend the press. - -Ladders were placed against the building, and the roof was set on fire. -Five men volunteered to go out and try to prevent the firing. They -left the building by the riverside, fired at the men on the ladder, -and drove them away. The crowd drew back, while the five returned to -the store. The mob did not venture to put up their ladder again, and -presently Lovejoy and two or three others opened a door and looked out. -There appeared to be no one on this side, and Lovejoy stepped forward -to reconnoiter. Some of his enemies, however, were hidden behind a pile -of lumber, and one of them fired a double-barreled gun. The editor -was hit by five balls. He turned around, ran up a flight of stairs in -the warehouse, and into the counting-room. There he fell, dying a few -minutes later. - -With their leader killed some of the company wanted to give up the -battle, while others insisted on fighting it out. They finally resolved -to yield. A clergyman went to one of the upper windows and called out -that Elijah Lovejoy had been killed and that they would give up the -press if they might be allowed to go unmolested. The crowd answered -that they would shoot them all where they were. One of the defenders -determined to go out at any risk and make terms. As soon as he opened -the door, he was fired upon and wounded. The roof was now blazing, and -one of their friends reached a door and begged them to escape by the -rear. All but two or three laid down their arms, running out at the -southern door, and fled down the bank of the river. The mob fired at -them, but only one was wounded. The crowd rushed into the warehouse, -threw the press out the window, breaking it into pieces, and scattered -the pieces in the Mississippi. At two o'clock they had disappeared, -having accomplished their evil purpose of preventing a "free press" in -Alton. - -Elijah Lovejoy was only thirty-five years old when he met his martyr's -death. His life in Missouri and Illinois had been one constant fight -against slavery, and for liberty of speech. His Puritan ancestry made it -impossible for him to give up the battle he knew to be right. The story -of his heroic struggle and death aroused lovers of liberty all over the -country, and newspapers everywhere denounced the acts of the mob at -Alton. Such acts meant that men could not speak their minds on public -questions, and a "free press" had been one of the dearest rights of -American citizens. Men in the North at that time had by no means agreed -that slavery must be abolished, but they did all believe in the freedom -of the press. For that cause Lovejoy had been a martyr. - -More than two decades were to pass before the question of slavery was to -be settled forever, and in the years between 1837 and 1860 many men of -the same stock and stripe as Elijah Lovejoy were to give up their lives -in heroic defense of their belief in freedom. He was one of the first -of a long line of heroes. His voice sounded a call that was to echo -through the border states for years to come, inspiring others to take up -his cause. A freedom-loving country should place among its noblest sons -this dauntless editor and preacher. - - - - -VI - -HOW MARCUS WHITMAN SAVED OREGON - - -The Hudson's Bay Company, whose business was to buy skins and furs -from the American Indians, had located a trading-post at Fort Walla -Walla, in the country of the Cayuse and Nez Percés Indians. This was -in what was known as Oregon Territory in 1842, although it is now -near the southeast corner of the state of Washington. Here was a very -primitive settlement, the frame houses of a few white men and the tents -of Indians. Very little effort had been made to grow grain or fruit or -to raise sheep or cattle, since the Hudson's Bay Company wanted the -Indians to be continually on the hunt for furs, and discouraged them -from turning into farmers. Besides the traders and the Indians there was -a small missionary camp near at hand, located on a beautiful peninsula -made by two branches of the Walla Walla River. This place was called -by the Indians Wai-i-lat-pui, meaning the region of rye grass. Beyond -the fertile ground on the river's banks were borders of timber-land, -and beyond them plains stretching to the foot-hills of the great Blue -Mountains. In 1842 this wonderful country was free to any who cared to -come and settle there, but as yet very few had ventured so far into the -wilderness. - -The chief man at the missionary camp, Dr. Marcus Whitman, was called to -Fort Walla Walla on the first day of October, 1842, to see a sick man. -He found a score or so of traders and Hudson's Bay clerks, almost all -Englishmen, gathered there, and accepted their invitation to stay to -dinner. The men were a genial company, and had already taken a liking -to Whitman, who was frank and amiable, and an interesting story-teller. -Gradually the conversation at the dinner table came round to a subject -that was vastly important to the men present, although the outside world -seemed to be paying little attention to it--to which country was this -great territory of Oregon to belong, to the United States or to England? -The general opinion appeared to be that under the old treaties it would -belong to the country that settled it first. - -In the midst of the discussion there was the sound of hoof-beats -outside, the door of the company's office was flung open, and an express -messenger ran into the dining-room. "I'm just from Fort Colville!" he -cried. "A hundred and forty Englishmen and Canadians are on the march to -settle here!" - -There was instant excitement. A young priest threw his cap in the -air, shouting, "Hurrah for Oregon--America's too late; we've got the -country!" The traders clapped each other on the shoulder, and made a -place for the messenger at the head of the table. As he ate he told them -how he had ridden from the post three hundred and fifty miles up the -Columbia River to let all the fur-traders know that the English were on -the way to colonize the country. - -Marcus Whitman smiled, and pretended to enjoy the celebration; but in -reality he was already considering whether he could not do something -to save this vast and fruitful region for his own nation. It was an -enormous tract of land, of untold wealth, and stretching over a long -reach of the Pacific coast. As he considered, Whitman heard the Hudson's -Bay Company's men grow more and more excited, until they declared that -they intended to take possession of all the country west to the Pacific -slope the following spring. - -The missionary had been expecting this struggle between the English -and the Americans for the ownership of Oregon, but had not thought -it would come to a head quite so soon. He left the men at Fort Walla -Walla as early as he could, and rode back to the little settlement -at Wai-i-lat-pui. There he told his wife and friends the news he had -learned at the trading-post. "If our country is to have Oregon," he -said, "there is not a day to lose." - -"But what can we do?" the others asked him. - -"I must get to Washington as quick as I can, and let them know the -danger." - -His friends understood what that meant, a journey on horseback across -almost an entire continent, through hostile Indians, over great rivers -and mountain ranges, and in the depths of winter. Some one pointed out -that under the rules of the American Mission Board that had sent them -into the far west none of their number could leave his post without -consent from the headquarters in Boston. "Well," said Whitman, "if the -Board dismisses me, I will do what I can to save Oregon to the country. -My life is of but little worth if I can save this country to the -American people." - -His wife, a brave, patriotic woman who had shared his hard travels -westward without a murmur, agreed with him that he must go. They all -insisted, however, that he should have a companion. "Who will go with -me?" asked Whitman. In answer a man who had only lately joined the small -encampment, Amos L. Lovejoy, immediately volunteered. - -Urging upon their friends the need of keeping the plan a secret from the -Hudson's Bay Company fur-traders, the two men quickly prepared, and left -the camp on October 3d. They had a guide, three pack-mules, and for the -start of their journey an escort of a number of Cayuse braves, men of -an Indian tribe that was not large, but was wealthy, and that seemed to -have taken a liking to Whitman and his friends at the mission settlement. - -The leader himself had one fixed idea in his mind, to reach Washington -before Congress adjourned. He was convinced that only through his -account of the riches of Oregon could the government learn what the -country stood in danger of losing. - -The little company got a good start, and with fresh horses, riding -southeast toward the border of what is now the state of Idaho, they -reached Fort Hall in eleven days. Here was stationed Captain Grant, who -had always done his best to hinder immigration into Oregon, and had -induced many an American settler to go no farther westward. He knew -Whitman of old, and six years before had tried to stop his expedition to -the Walla Walla River, but Whitman had overcome his arguments, and had -taken the first wagon that ever crossed the Rocky Mountains into Oregon. -As he had tried to prevent Whitman from going west before, so now he -tried to prevent him from going east. He told him that the Blackfeet -Indians had suddenly grown hostile to all white men, that the Sioux and -Pawnees were at war with each other, and would let no one through their -country, and finally that the snow was already twenty feet deep in the -passes of the Rockies, and travel through them was altogether out of the -question. - -This information was far from reassuring, and, backed as it was by -Captain Grant's entreaties and almost by his commands, would have -deterred many a man from plunging into that winter wilderness. Whitman, -however, was a man who could neither be turned aside nor discouraged. -His answer to all protests at Fort Hall was to point to the official -permit he had carried west with him, ordering all officers to protect -and aid him in his travels, and signed by Lewis Cass, Secretary of -War, and to declare that he intended to push on east, hostile Indians, -mountains, and blizzards notwithstanding. Captain Grant saw that he -could not stop Whitman, and, much to his chagrin, had to let him pass -the fort. - -The route Whitman had plotted out lay first east and then south, in the -general direction of the present site of Salt Lake City. His objective -points were two small military posts, Fort Uintah and Fort Uncompahgra. -As soon as the two men left Fort Hall they ran into terribly cold -weather. The deep snow kept them back, and they had to pick any shelter -they could find, and crawl slowly on, sometimes taking a day to cover -a few miles. At Fort Uintah they procured a guide to the second post, -which was on the Grand River, and at the latter point a Mexican agreed -to show them the way to Taos, a settlement in what is now the state of -New Mexico. So far their southeasterly course had allowed them to skirt -the high mountains, but here they had to cross a range, and in the pass -ran full into a terrific snow-storm. - -It was impossible to go forward in the teeth of that gale, so Whitman, -Lovejoy, and their guide looked about for shelter. They found a rocky -defile with a mountain shoulder to protect it, and led their horses and -pack-mules into this pocket. In this dark, cold place they stayed for -ten days, trying each morning to push on through the pass, and being -blown back each time. On the eleventh day the wind had abated somewhat, -and they tried again. They went a short distance when, coming around a -corner, a fresh storm broke full upon them, blinding and freezing the -men, and pelting the animals with frozen snow so that they were almost -uncontrollable. - -The native guide now admitted that he was no longer sure of the way, -and refused to go any farther. Clearly the only thing to be done was to -return for the eleventh time to the sheltered ravine. But now the snow -had drifted across their trail, and none of the three men was at all -certain of the road back. Whitman dismounted, and kneeling in the snow, -prayed that they might be saved for the work that they had to do. - -Meantime the guide resolved to try an old hunting expedient, and turned -one of the lead mules loose. The mule was confused at first, and -stumbled about, heading one way and then another, but finally started to -plunge back through the drifts as if to a certain goal. "There," shouted -the guide, "that mule will find the camp if he can live long enough in -this storm to reach it." The men urged their horses after the plunging -beast, and slipping and sliding and beating their half-frozen mounts, -at last came around the mountain shoulder and got in the lee of the -ravine. That bit of hunter's knowledge and that mule had much to do with -saving the great northwest to the United States. - -Once safe in this comparative shelter the guide turned to Dr. Whitman. -"I will go no farther," said he; "the way is impassable." - -Whitman knew that the man meant what he said, and he had just seen for -himself what a storm could do to travelers, but he said as positively in -the ravine as he had already said in the comfortable protection of Fort -Hall, "I must go on." He considered their situation a minute, and then -said to Lovejoy, "You stay in camp, and I'll return with the guide to -the fort and get a new man." - -The pack-mules needed rest, and so this plan was agreed to. Whitman and -the obstinate guide went back, while Lovejoy waited in the ravine and -tried to nourish the mules by gathering brush and the inner bark of -willows for them to eat. Fortunately mules can live on almost anything. - -For a week Lovejoy stayed in the ravine, only partly sheltered from wind -and snow, before Whitman returned. He brought a new guide with him, and, -the storm having now lessened, the little party was able to get through -the pass and strike out for the post at Taos. - -The route Whitman was taking was far from direct, was in fact at least a -thousand miles longer than if they had headed directly east from Walla -Walla, but they were avoiding the highest Rockies, and were traveling -to a certain extent in the shelter of the ranges, where there was much -less snow and plenty of fire-wood could be found. The winter of 1842-43 -was very cold, and if they had journeyed direct the continual storms and -lack of all fuel for camp-fires might have caused a different ending -to their cross-country ride. As it was they suffered continually from -frozen feet and hands and ears, and lost a number of days when one or -the other could not sit his saddle. - -Traveling far to the south they came to the Grand River, one of the most -dangerous rivers in the west. The current, even in summer, is rapid, -deep, and cold. Now, in winter, solid ice stretched two hundred feet -from either shore, and between the ice was a rushing torrent over two -hundred feet wide. - -The guide studied the swift, boiling current, and shook his head. "It's -too risky to try to cross," he declared. - -"We must cross, and at once," said Whitman positively. He dismounted, -and, picking out a willow tree near the shore, cut a pole about eight -feet long. He carried this back to his horse, mounted, and put the pole -on his shoulder, gripping it with his left arm. "Now you shove me off," -he said to the men. Lovejoy and the guide did as he ordered, and Whitman -and his horse were pushed into the stream. They disappeared under the -water, but soon came up, struggling and swimming. In a minute or two the -horse struck rocky bottom and could wade. Whitman jumped off, broke the -ice with his pole, and helped the animal to get to the shore. - -Meantime Lovejoy and the guide, breaking the ice on their side, headed -their horses and the pack-mules into the river. Animals in that country -are always ready to follow where their leader goes, and they all swam -and splashed their way across. The men found plenty of wood at hand, and -soon had a roaring fire, by which they camped, and dried out thoroughly -before riding on. - -The delays caused by their stay in the mountains and physical hardships -had made their store of provisions run low. At one time they had to -kill a dog that had joined them, and a little later one of the mules -for food. Eating and sleeping little, and pushing on as rapidly as they -could they finally reached the old city of Santa Fé, the metropolis of -the southwest. But here Whitman only stopped long enough to buy fresh -provisions. - -They were now heading for Bent's Fort near the head of the Arkansas -River. The storms in the hills were past, and they were riding over -vast treeless prairies, where there was plenty of grass for the horses, -and any amount of wild game if they could have stopped long enough to -replenish their larder with it. Again and again they were forced to -prairie expedients. Once, as they reached one of the tributaries of -the Arkansas River, after a long and tedious day on the plains, they -found the river frozen over with a layer of smooth, clear ice, hardly -strong enough to bear a man. They must have wood, but although there was -plenty of it on the other side, there was none on their shore of the -stream. Whitman took the ax from his kit, and lying down on the thin -ice, contrived with great caution and patience to make his way across. -On the other bank he cut long poles and short cross-pieces. These he -pushed across the ice to Lovejoy, and with them they made enough of a -bridge for the latter to urge the horses and mules to try to cross. They -all got over safely, though with much slipping and splashing. In cutting -his last pole Whitman split the ax-helve. When they camped he bound the -break with a deerskin thong, but that night a thieving wolf found the -ax at the edge of the camp, wanted the fresh deerskin, and dragged away -ax and thong. The loss would have been very serious if it had happened -earlier in their journey. - -When they were within four days' ride of Bent's Fort they met a -caravan traveling toward Taos. The leader told Whitman that a party of -mountaineers was about leaving Bent's Fort for St. Louis, but added that -Whitman and Lovejoy, hampered by their pack animals, would not be in -time to join them. - -Whitman was very anxious to join the mountaineers if he could, and -decided to leave Lovejoy and the guide with the pack-mules. Taking the -fastest horse, and a small store of food, he rode on alone, hoping -to catch the party. To do this he would have to travel on Sunday, -something they had not done before. - -Lovejoy saw Dr. Whitman start on his ride, but when the former reached -Bent's Fort four days later he was astonished to find that Whitman had -not arrived there, nor been heard from. As that part of the country was -full of packs of gray wolves, now half-starved on account of the snow, -Lovejoy was alarmed. - -If not a prey to the wolves, Whitman must be lost; so his friend took -a good guide from the Fort and started to search for him. He traveled -up-river a hundred miles, and there fell in with Indians who told him -of a lost white man who was trying to find the Fort, and whom they had -directed down the river. Lovejoy went back, and late that afternoon saw -Whitman come riding in, convinced that his journey had been so much -delayed because he had traveled on Sunday. - -The party of mountaineers had already left, but a messenger had been -sent after them, and they stayed in camp, waiting for Whitman. Tired as -he was, he started out immediately with a new guide, particularly eager -to join this company, because they were now nearing the outposts of -civilization, where the worst white men and Indians beset the pioneers. -Lovejoy waited at Bent's Fort, and went east with the next caravan that -started for St. Louis. - -Whitman came safely through to St. Louis, where he had friends. He was -at once surrounded by trappers and traders in Indian goods and furs -who wanted news of the plains. In his turn he asked news of Congress, -and learned that the Ashburton Treaty, settling a part of the boundary -between Canada and the United States, had been approved and signed, but -that the question of Oregon had not been settled, and from the reports -of what had been said in the debates at Washington he knew that none of -the American statesmen realized what a great prize Oregon Territory was. - -He must reach the capital before Congress adjourned if possible. The -rivers were frozen, and he had to rely on a journey by stage, slow at -all times, but especially so in midwinter. He toiled slowly eastward, -taking one coach after another, swinging and swaying and rocking across -the center of the country, and reaching the capital in time to plead the -cause of the northwest. - -Washington was used to many strange types of men in those pioneer days, -but even among such Marcus Whitman was a striking figure. He was of -medium height, compact of build, with big shoulders and a large head. -His hair was iron gray, and that, as well as his moustache and beard, -had not been cut for four months. He was of pioneer type, living so -long among Indians and trappers, and watching so constantly for wolves -and bears, that he seemed awkward and uncouth in an eastern city. His -clothes were a coarse fur jacket with buckskin breeches, fur leggings, -and boot moccasins. Over these he wore a buffalo overcoat, with a -head-hood for bad weather. He did not show an inch of woven garment. - -Whitman reached Washington in March, 1843, and immediately urged his -case before President Tyler, Secretary of State Daniel Webster, and -many congressmen. He found the densest ignorance concerning Oregon -Territory, a tract of territory which has since been divided into the -three states of Washington, Oregon, and Idaho. A senator had said of -that territory, "What is the character of this country? As I understand -it there are seven hundred miles this side of the Rocky Mountains that -are uninhabitable; where rain never falls; mountains wholly impassable, -except through gaps and depressions, to be reached only by going -hundreds of miles out of the direct course.... Of what use would it be -for agricultural purposes? I would not, for that purpose, give a pinch -of snuff for the whole territory. I wish the Rocky Mountains were an -impassable barrier. If there was an embankment of even five feet to be -removed I would not consent to expend five dollars to remove it and -enable our population to go there." Another statesman declared, "With -the exception of land along the Willamette and strips along other water -courses, the whole country is as irreclaimable and barren a waste as the -Desert of Sahara. Nor is this the worst; the climate is so unfriendly -to human life that the native population has dwindled away under the -ravages of malaria." And newspaper opinions were no more favorable. -The Louisville _Journal_ wrote, "Of all the countries upon the face of -the earth Oregon is one of the least favored by heaven. It is the mere -riddlings of creation. It is almost as barren as Sahara and quite as -unhealthy as the Campagna of Italy. Russia has her Siberia and England -has her Botany Bay, and if the United States should ever need a country -to which to banish her rogues and scoundrels, the utility of such a -region as Oregon would be demonstrated. Until then, we are perfectly -willing to leave this magnificent country to the Indians, trappers and -buffalo hunters that roam over its sand-banks." - -Marcus Whitman had ridden four thousand miles, and starved, frozen, -and never rested in order to overcome such opinions. The President and -Daniel Webster were polite to him, but neither seemed to think much of -the northwest. As he was describing the richness of the country, its -fertile soil, great forests, precious minerals, and delightful climate, -Webster interrupted. "But Oregon is shut off by impassable mountains and -a great desert, which make a wagon road impossible," said he. Whitman -answered, "Six years ago I was told there was no wagon road to Oregon, -and it was impossible to take a wagon there, and yet in despite of -pleadings and almost threats, I took a wagon over the road and have -it now." The missionary's earnest, forceful manner impressed both -President Tyler and Secretary Webster, and gradually they began to think -it might be worth while to protect the claim of the United States to -that country. Finally Whitman said, "All I ask is that you won't barter -away Oregon, or allow English interference until I can lead a band of -stalwart American settlers across the plains: for this I will try to do." - -"Dr. Whitman," answered President Tyler, "your long ride and frozen -limbs speak for your courage and patriotism; your missionary credentials -are good vouchers for your character;" and he granted the request. - -This was all Whitman wanted, because he believed that under the treaty -then in force between the United States and England the nation that -should colonize the country was to own it. He knew that up to that time -the English Hudson's Bay Company had bought out all American traders or -driven out all settlers, but he hoped he could lead enough emigrants -there now to hold it for the United States. - -He next went to the American Missionary Board in Boston, which had -originally sent him out to Oregon. There he met with cold treatment, -and was told he should not have left the camp at Wai-i-lat-pui without -permission from Boston, and that his trip across the continent was a -wild-goose chase. This unmerited rebuke must have hurt him sorely. -He was, however, so filled with eagerness to lead his party of -pioneers west that he did not let it daunt him, but went on with his -preparations. In this he was very much helped by his companion Lovejoy, -who was gathering a large number of emigrants on the frontier awaiting -Whitman's return. - -The meeting point of the emigrants was the little town of Weston, not -far from where Kansas City now stands. Here and at various near-by -settlements the pioneers gathered early in the year 1843, waiting for -Dr. Whitman to join them, and for the spring grass to grow high enough -to feed their cattle. As it happened, that year the grass was late, and -the caravan did not get under way until the first week in June. Whitman -himself was delayed through the need of leaving careful instructions -for those who were to cross the plains later in the year. The caravan -started before Whitman arrived, and he did not overtake the advance -guard until they had reached the Platte River. When he did actually join -the emigrants he looked after everything, mending broken prairie wagons, -cheering tired mothers, acting as surgeon and doctor, hunting out fords -through quicksands and rivers, searching for water and grass in the -desert plains, seeking new passes through the mountains, and at night -superintending the building of camp-fires and keeping watch against an -attack by wolves or other wild animals. - -The journey from the Platte River as far as Fort Hall, which was near -the eastern border of Oregon Territory, was much like other pioneer -travels through the west. Whitman had been over this trail several times -and the difficulties he encountered were not new to him. At Fort Hall -he had to meet Captain John Grant again, who, as an agent of the Fur -Company, did not want new farmers to settle in Oregon. - -[Illustration: THE LAST SIX HUNDRED MILES WERE THE HARDEST] - -Instead of appealing only to a few men Captain Grant now spoke to -several hundred resolute pioneers. He told them of the terrors of the -long journey through the mountains and the impossibility of hauling -their heavy prairie wagons over the passes; he recounted the failures -of other pioneers who had tried what they had planned to do; he showed -them in the corral wagons, farm tools, and other pioneer implements -that earlier emigrants had had to leave when they ventured into the -mountains. He stated the difficulties so clearly that this company -was almost persuaded, as earlier companies had been, to follow his -suggestions, leave their farming implements behind, and try to make a -settlement without any of the tools or comforts that were so greatly -needed in that country. Whitman, however, spoiled Grant's plans. He said -to his followers, "Men, I have guided you thus far in safety. Believe -nothing you hear about not being able to get your wagons through; every -one of you stick to your wagons and your goods. They will be invaluable -to you when you reach the end of your journey. I took a wagon over to -Oregon six years ago." The men believed their leader, refused to obey -Captain Grant, and prepared to start on the trail into the high Rockies. - -It was the last six hundred miles of the journey to Oregon that usually -made the most severe test of the settlers' endurance. From Fort Hall -the nature of the traveling changed entirely, and was apt to resemble -the retreat of a disorganized army. Earlier caravans, although they had -taken Captain Grant's advice and left many wagons, horses, and camp -comforts behind, had suffered untold hardships. Oxen and horses, worn -by their long trip across the plains, and toiling for long stretches -through the high passes, were apt to perish in large numbers and -frequently fell dead in their yokes on the road. Wagons already baked in -the blazing sun of the desert would fall to pieces when they struck a -sharp rock or were driven over a rough incline. Families were obliged to -join company and throw away everything that tended to impede their speed. - -The approaching storms of autumn, which meant impassable snow, would not -allow them to linger. In addition to this there were grizzlies in the -mountains and the constant fear of attack from Indians. Such pioneers as -strayed from the main company were likely to fall in with an enemy that -was continually hovering on either flank of the march, ready to swoop -down upon unprotected men or women. This fear added to the speed of the -journey, and as they progressed the road over which they traveled was -strewn with dead or worn-out cattle, abandoned wagons, discarded cooking -utensils, yokes, harness, chests, log chains, and all kinds of family -heirlooms that the settlers had hoped to carry to their new homes. -Sometimes the teams grew so much weakened that none dared to ride in -the wagons, and men, women, and children would walk beside them, ready -to give a helping push up any steep part of the road. A pioneer who -had once made this journey said, referring to a former trip across the -mountains, "The fierce summer's heat beat upon this slow west-rolling -column. The herbage was dry and crisp, the rivulets had become but lines -in the burning sand; the sun glared from a sky of brass; the stony -mountainsides glared with the garnered heat of a cloudless summer. The -dusky brambles of the scraggy sage-brush seemed to catch the fiery rays -of heat and shiver them into choking dust, that rose like a tormenting -plague and hung like a demon of destruction over the panting oxen and -thirsty people. - -"Thus day after day, for weeks and months, the slow but urgent retreat -continued, each day demanding fresh sacrifices. An ox or a horse would -fall, brave men would lift the useless yoke from his limp and lifeless -neck in silence. If there was another to take his place he was brought -from the loose band, yoked up and the journey resumed. When the stock -of oxen became exhausted, cows were brought under the yoke, other wagons -left, and the lessening store once more inspected; if possible another -pound would be dispensed with. - -"Deeper and deeper into the flinty mountains the forlorn mass drives its -weary way. Each morning the weakened team has to commence a struggle -with yet greater difficulties. It is plain the journey will not be -completed within the anticipated time, and the dread of hunger joins the -ranks of the tormentors.... The Indians hover in the rear, impatiently -waiting for the train to move on that the abandoned trinkets may be -gathered up. Whether these are gathering strength for a general attack -we cannot tell. There is but one thing to do--press on. The retreat -cannot hasten into rout, for the distance to safety is too great. Slower -and slower is the daily progress." - -Marcus Whitman, however, had known these difficulties before, and -guarded his caravan from many of them. - -Up to that date almost no man had crossed into Oregon by the route -he was taking. A few missionaries had made the journey on horseback, -driving some head of cattle with them, and three or four wagons drawn -by oxen had reached the Snake River at an earlier date, but it was the -general opinion of trappers that no large company of people could travel -down the Snake River because of the scarcity of pasturage and the rugged -road through the mountains. It was also thought that the Sioux Indians -would oppose the approach of such a large caravan because the emigrants -might kill or drive away the buffaloes, which were already diminishing -in number and were hunted by this tribe for food. - -When they came to cross the Snake River Whitman gave orders to fasten -the wagons together in one long line, the strongest ones being placed in -the lead. When the teams were in position Whitman tied a long rope about -his waist and fastened the other end to the first team. Riding his horse -into the current he swam across the river. He called to the other riders -to follow him, and at the same time to pull on the rope that was tied to -the first team. In this way the leaders were started into the water, and -all were drawn over in safety. At times, however, it took a great deal -of pulling on the ropes by many men to drag the weaker teams to a safe -foothold on the farther bank. The Snake River at the place where Whitman -forded it was divided into three separate rivers by islands, and as -the last stream on the Oregon shore was a deep and rapid current fully -a mile wide, it can be seen what a task it was to get so many wagons, -tired ox-teams, and the great company of men, women and children across -it. But Whitman had solved many such problems before. When he and his -wife went to Oregon six years earlier she had said it was a shame that -her husband should wear himself out in getting their wagon through. -"Yesterday," she said, "it was overset in the river and he was wet from -head to foot getting it out; to-day it was upset on the mountainside, -and it was hard work to save it." - -There were over a thousand people in this expedition that was going out -to colonize Oregon for the United States. They had about one hundred -and twenty wagons drawn by ox-teams, which averaged six yoke of oxen to -a team, and, in addition, several thousand horses and cattle, led or -driven by the emigrants. Although they started to travel in one body -they soon found they could do better by dividing into two columns, -marching within easy hailing distance of each other, so long as they -were in danger of attack by the Indians, and later separating into small -parties, better suited to the narrow mountain paths and the meagre -pasture lands. - -It is interesting to learn how such a company traveled. At four o'clock -in the morning the sentinels who were on guard waked the camp by shots -from their rifles, the emigrants crept from their canvas-covered wagons -or tents built against the side of the wagons, and soon the smoke of -camp-fires began to rise in the air. Sixty men, whose duty it was to -look after the cattle, would start out from the corral, or enclosed -space, spreading through the horses and cattle, who had found pasturage -over night in a great semicircle about the camp. The most distant -animals were sometimes two miles away. These sixty scouts looked for -Indian trails beyond the herd and tried to discover whether any of -the animals had been stolen or had strayed during the night. If none -were lost the herders drove the animals close to the camp, and by five -o'clock horses, oxen, and cattle were rounded up, and the separate -emigrants chose their teams and drove them into the corral to be yoked. -The corral was a circle about one hundred yards deep, formed by wagons -fastened together by ox-chains, making a barrier that could not be -broken by any vicious ox or horse, and a fortification in case of an -attack by Indians. - -The camp was very busy from six to seven o'clock; the women prepared -breakfast; the tents were packed away, the wagons loaded and the oxen -yoked and fastened to their owners' wagons. Each of the two divisions -had about sixty wagons, and these were separated into sixteen platoons. -Each platoon took its turn at leading, and in this way none of the -wagons had to travel continually in the dust. By seven o'clock the -corral was broken up; the women and children had found their places in -the wagons, and the leader, or pilot as he was called, mounted his horse -and was ready to lead the way for the day's journey. A band of young men -who were not needed at the wagons, well mounted and armed, would start -on a buffalo hunt, keeping within easy reach of the caravan and hoping -to bring back food for the night's encampment. - -At seven o'clock the trumpet sounded the advance, and the wagon that -was to lead for that day slowly rolled out of the camp and headed -the line of march. The other wagons fell in behind it, and guided by -the horsemen, the long line commenced its winding route through the -mountains. - -The country through which Whitman had chosen to travel was beautiful -in the extreme; at times the road lay through the great heights of the -Rockies, with a panorama of wonderful charm stretched on the horizon; -at times it lay beside broad rivers where the clearness of the air -brought out all the colors of late summer foliage. The party of hunters -were also scouts for the caravan, searching the rivers for the most -promising fords. Having found one to their liking, they would signal -with a flag to the pilot and his guides to show in which direction to -lead the wagons. These guides kept constantly on the alert, for it would -be hard if they had to march a mile or two out of their way or retrace -their steps because of wrong advice. The rest of the emigrants trusted -the route entirely to their leaders and rode or marched stolidly along, -occasionally stopping to gather a few flowers for the women and children -in the wagons. At noon the whole line stopped for dinner. The scouting -party would carefully choose a good camping place, looking especially -for the grass and water that were so much needed at the end of five -hours of hard traveling. The teams were not unyoked, but only turned -loose from their wagons, and the latter were drawn up in columns, four -abreast. No corral was formed, as there was little danger from Indians -or risk of animals straying in the daytime. - -At this noon rest many matters were discussed by the caravan leaders. -Whitman and one or two others had been chosen to decide disputes between -the different members of the party. Orders for the good of the caravan -would be given out at this time, and Dr. Whitman would visit any who -were sick and advise with the various families as to new difficulties -they had met with. - -When dinner was eaten and the teams rested the march was resumed, and -continued until sundown, when the scouts picked out the best camping -place for the night. The wagons were driven into a great circle, -fastened each to each, and the cattle freed to seek a pasture; tents -were pitched, fires started, and all hands were busy. The scene was -almost like a small frontier town. - -The caravan was divided into three companies, and each of the companies -subdivided into four watches. Each company had the duty of acting as -sentries for the camp every third night, and each watch took its turn. -The first watch was set at eight o'clock in the evening, just after the -evening meal. For a short time there would be talking, perhaps singing, -or the music of the violin or flute. Usually, however, the day's -traveling had been hard and trying, and at an early hour the emigrants -went to sleep. - -Late in the summer of 1843 Whitman's pioneers left the mountains behind -them, and came down into the valleys watered by the tributaries of -the Columbia River. As they approached the missionary settlement at -Wai-i-lat-pui a band of Cayuse and Nez Percés Indians came to meet them, -bringing pack-mules loaded with supplies. Few messengers could have been -more welcome. They told Whitman that his wife and friends were still at -the little clearing where he had left them almost a year before, and -were eagerly looking forward to the arrival of the new settlers. The -leader thought that the caravan could finish its journey without him -now, so he chose one of his most reliable Indian guides, Istikus, and -placed him in charge of the company. Whitman himself hurried on to the -mission. Back of him rolled the long train of canvas-covered wagons -that had traveled so far over prairies, rivers, and mountains. Almost -a thousand men, women, and children were coming into this far western -section of the continent to settle and hold the country for the United -States. - -Whitman's ride changed the situation. No more statesmen could speak -of the impassable mountains or the impossibility of taking settlers' -wagons into Oregon. Before Whitman left Washington Daniel Webster sent -a message to England stating that the United States would insist on -holding all territory south of the forty-ninth degree of latitude. When -President Tyler was told that a caravan of nearly a thousand people -under Whitman's leadership had started for Oregon, a second and more -positive message to the same effect was sent to England. All over the -United States men were now demanding that their government should claim -the country as far as the Pacific coast, and one great political party -took as its watchword the motto, "Oregon, fifty-four, forty,--or fight," -referring to the degree of latitude they wanted for the boundary line. -The Hudson's Bay Company, finding so large a colony of pioneers settling -among them, was forced to give over its efforts to hold the northwest -entirely for itself. In time the English statesmen agreed to the claims -of the United States, and on July 17, 1846, a treaty was signed, fixing -the boundary between Canada and the United States at the forty-ninth -degree, which gave Oregon to the Republic. - -The settlers prospered, and the little missionary colony near the Walla -Walla River grew in size. Whitman resumed his work among the Indians, -and seemed to win their friendship. There seemed no reason why the -native tribes and their white friends should not live in peace in such -an undeveloped country. After a time, however, fear or greed or false -leaders stirred up certain Indians and sent them on the war-path against -their friends. No one knew the real cause for the outburst, but on -November 29, 1847, a band of the Cayuse crept down on the little cluster -of houses at Wai-i-lat-pui and killed fourteen of the white settlers. -Marcus Whitman was one of the first to fall. He was in his house, with -several Indians as usual in the room with him. One was sitting close to -him, asking for some medicine, when another came up behind and struck -him with a tomahawk. These two then gave the signal, and their allies -in other houses fell upon the white men and women. After the massacre -forty men, women, and children were carried away from the valley by the -Indians, but most of them were later rescued by the Hudson's Bay Company -and sent back to their homes. Other white settlers joined forces and -marched against the treacherous Cayuse, but the latter fled through the -country, scattering into different tribes, and the leaders of the attack -were not captured until nearly two years later. - -Daniel Webster had said in the Senate: "What do we want with the vast, -worthless area, this region of savages and wild beasts, of deserts, of -shifting sands and whirlwinds of dust, of cactus and prairie dogs? To -what use could we ever hope to put these great deserts, or these endless -mountain ranges, impenetrable, and covered to their base with eternal -snow? What can we ever hope to do with the western coast, a coast of -three thousand miles, rock-bound, cheerless, and uninviting, and not -a harbor on it? What use have we for such a country?" But though many -great statesmen agreed with Webster a simple missionary who had been to -Oregon looked into the future, saw the value of the vast expanse, and -had the courage and determination to ride across the continent for aid, -and then bring back a thousand settlers to help him realize his dream. -Marcus Whitman is one of the noblest examples of that great type of -pioneers who won the western country for the United States. - - - - -VII - -HOW THE MORMONS CAME TO SETTLE UTAH - - -In the winter of 1838-39 a large number of people moved into the country -on the east bank of the Mississippi River in the state of Illinois. They -had taken the name of "Latter-Day Saints," but were generally called -Mormons, and were followers of a new religion that had been founded by -a man named Joseph Smith a few years earlier. This strange new religion -had attracted many people to it, and the greater number of them had -first moved to Ohio, and then into the new state of Missouri, but they -were not well received by the people of either of those states, and had -finally been driven from Missouri at the point of the sword. Fortunately -for them there was plenty of unoccupied land in the West, and their -leader decided to take refuge near the town of Quincy in Illinois. At -that time a man had only to reside in the state for six months in order -to cast a vote for president, and as an election was near at hand the -politicians of Illinois were glad to welcome the Mormons. Looking about, -the newcomers found two "paper" cities, or places that had been mapped -out on paper with streets and houses, but had never actually been -built. The Mormon leaders bought two large farms in the "paper" town of -Commerce, and many thousand acres in the country adjoining, and there -they laid out their new city, to which they gave the strange name of -Nauvoo. - -The Mormon city lay along the Mississippi River, and its streets and -public buildings were planned on a large scale. People flocked to the -place, and as the Mormon missionaries were eager workers the number of -converts grew rapidly. A temple was built, which a stranger who saw -it in 1843 said was the wonder of the world. Many Mormon emigrants -came from England, usually by ship to New Orleans, and thence by river -steamboat up the Mississippi to Nauvoo. By the end of 1844 at least -fifteen thousand people had settled there, and as many more were -scattered through the country in the immediate neighborhood. Nauvoo was -the largest city in Illinois, and its only rival in that part of the -West was St. Louis. Joseph Smith had obtained a charter, and both the -political parties, the Whigs and the Democrats, were doing their best to -make friends of his people. Nauvoo had little of the rough look of most -newly-settled frontier towns, and handsome houses and public buildings -sprang up rapidly along its fine wide streets. - -[Illustration: NAUVOO HAD HANDSOME HOUSES AND PUBLIC BUILDINGS] - -Unfortunately for the Mormons their leader was a man who made enemies as -easily as he made friends. He had aroused much ill feeling when he lived -in Missouri. As a result, when, one day in May, 1842, Governor Boggs -of Missouri was shot and seriously wounded while sitting at the window -of his home, many people laid the crime to Smith or his followers, and -believed that the prophet himself, as Smith was called, had ordered the -shooting. The officers of Missouri asked the governor of Illinois to -hand Smith over to them. This was not done, and consequently ill feeling -against the prophet grew stronger. In the meantime a man named John C. -Bennett, who had joined the Mormons at Nauvoo, and had been the first -mayor of the city, deserted the church, and turned into one of the most -bitter of its enemies. He denounced the Mormons in letters he wrote to -the newspapers, and exposed what he called their secrets. This led other -people to attack the ideas of the Mormons, and it was not long before -there was almost as much dislike of them in Illinois as there had been -in Missouri. - -Even in the Mormon church itself there were men who would not agree -with all the prophet Joseph Smith said. A few of these men set up a -printing-press and published a paper that they called the _Nauvoo -Expositor_. Only one issue of this sheet appeared, dated June 7, 1844. -That was enough, however, to raise the wrath of Joseph Smith and his -elders, and they ordered the city marshal to destroy the press. The -marshal broke the press and type in the main street of the city, and -burned the contents of the newspaper office. - -The editors hastily fled to the neighboring town of Carthage. The -people there and in all the neighboring villages denounced the -destruction of the press, and declared that the time had come to force -the Mormons to obey the laws, and, if they would not do so, to drive -them out of Illinois. Military companies were formed, cannon were sent -for, and the governor of the state was asked to call out the militia. - -The governor went to the scene of the trouble to investigate. He found -all that part of the east shore of the Mississippi divided between -the Mormons and their enemies. He ordered the mayor of Nauvoo to send -Mormons to him to explain why they had destroyed the printing-press, and -when he had heard their story the governor told them that Smith and his -elders must surrender to him, or the whole military force of the state -would be called out to capture them. But the prophet had not been idle. -He had put his city under martial law, had formed what was called the -Legion of the Mormons, and had called in his followers from the near-by -villages. He had meant to defend his new city; but when he heard the -governor's threat to arrest him, he left Nauvoo with a few comrades and -started for the Rocky Mountains. Friends went after him, and begged -him not to desert his people. He could not resist their appeal to him -to return, and he went back, although he was afraid of the temper of -his enemies. As soon as he returned to Illinois he was arrested on the -charge of treason and of putting Nauvoo under martial law, and together -with his brother Hyrum was sent to the jail at Carthage. - -Some seventeen hundred men, members of the militia, had gathered at the -towns of Carthage and Warsaw, and the enemies of the Mormons urged the -governor to march at the head of these troops to Nauvoo. He knew that -in the excited state of affairs there was danger that if these troops -entered the city they might set it on fire and destroy much property. -He therefore ordered all except three companies to disband; with one -company he set out to visit the Mormon city, and the other two companies -he left to guard the jail at Carthage. - -The governor marched to Nauvoo, spoke to the citizens, and, having -assured them that he meant no harm to their church, left about sundown -on his road back to Carthage. In the meantime, however, events had been -happening in the latter place that were to affect the whole history of -the Mormons. - -The two Smiths, Joseph and Hyrum, with two friends, Willard Richards and -John Taylor, were sitting in a large room in the Carthage jail when a -number of men, their faces blackened in disguise, came running up the -stairway. The door of the room had no lock or bolt, and, as the men -inside feared some attack, Hyrum Smith and Richards leaped to the door -and shutting it stood with their shoulders against it. The men outside -could not force the door open, and began to shoot through it. The two -men at the door were driven back, and on the second volley of shot -Hyrum Smith was killed. As his brother fell the prophet seized a six -shooting revolver that one of their visitors had left on the table, and -going to the door opened it a few inches. He snapped each barrel at the -men on the stair; three barrels missed fire, but each of the three that -exploded wounded a man. As the prophet fired Taylor and Richards stood -close beside him, each armed with a hickory cane. When Joseph Smith -stopped shooting the enemy fired another volley into the room. Taylor -tried to strike down some of the guns that were leveled through the -broken door. - -"That's right, Brother Taylor, parry them off as well as you can!" -cried Joseph Smith. He ran to the window, intending to leap out, but as -he jumped two bullets fired through the doorway struck him, and also -another aimed from outside the building. As soon as the mob saw that the -prophet was killed they scattered, alarmed at what had been done. - -The people of Carthage and the neighboring country expected that the -Legion of the Mormons would immediately march on them and destroy them. -Families fled in wagons, on horseback, and on foot. Most of the people -of the near-by town of Warsaw crossed the Mississippi in order to put -the river between them and their enemies. In this state of excitement -the governor did not know which party to trust, so he rode to the town -of Quincy, forty miles away, and at a safe distance from the scene of -trouble. But the Mormons made no attempt to avenge the death of their -leader; they intended to let the law look after that. - -Week by week, however, it grew harder for them to live on friendly terms -with the other people of Western Illinois, and more and more troubles -arose to sow distrust. The Gentiles, as those who were not Mormons were -called, began to charge the Mormons with stealing their horses and -cattle, and the state repealed the charter that had been granted to the -city of Nauvoo. - -During that summer of 1845, the troubles of Nauvoo's people increased. -One night in September a meeting of Gentiles at the town of Green Plains -was fired on, and many laid the attack to the Mormons. Whether this was -true or not, their enemies gathered in force and scoured the country, -burning the houses, barns, and crops of the Latter-Day Saints, and -driving them from the country behind the walls of Nauvoo. From their -city streets the saints rode out to pay their enemies in kind, and so -the warfare went on until the governor appointed officers to try to -settle the feud. The people, however, wanted the matter settled in only -one way. They insisted that the Mormons must leave Illinois. In reply -word came from Nauvoo that the Saints would go in the spring, provided -that they were not molested, and that the Gentiles would help them -to sell or rent their houses and farms, and give them oxen, horses, -wagons, dry-goods, and cash in exchange for their property. The Gentile -neighbors would not promise to buy the goods the Mormons had for sale, -but promised not to interfere with their selling whatever they could. At -last the trouble seemed settled. Brigham Young, the new leader of the -Mormons, said that the whole church would start for some place beyond -the Rocky Mountains in the spring, if they could sell enough goods to -make the journey there. So the people of Nauvoo prepared to abandon the -buildings of their new flourishing city on the Mississippi, and spent -the winter trading their houses for flour, sugar, seeds, tents, wagons, -horses, cattle, and whatever else might be needed for the long trip -across the plains. - -The Mormons now looked forward eagerly to their march to a new home, -and many of them traveled through the near-by states, buying horses and -mules, and more went to the large towns in the neighborhood to work -as laborers and so add to the funds for their journey. The leaders -announced that a company of young men would start west in March, and -choose a good situation for their new city. There they would build -houses, and plant crops which should be ready when the rest of the -Mormons arrived. But they knew there was always a chance that the people -of the country would attack them, and therefore they sent messengers to -the governors of the territories they would cross, asking for protection -on the march. On February 10th Brigham Young and a few other men crossed -the Mississippi and selected a spot on Sugar Creek as the first camp -for the people who were to follow. Young and the twelve elders of the -Mormons traveled together, and wherever their camp was pitched that -place was given the name of "Camp of Israel." - -The emigrants had a test of hardship even when they first moved across -the Mississippi. The temperature dropped to twenty degrees below zero, -and the canvas-covered wagons and tents were a poor shelter from the -snow-storms for women and children who had been used to the comforts -of a large town. Many crossed the Mississippi on ice. When they were -gathered on Sugar Creek Brigham Young spoke to them from a wagon. He -told them of the perils of the journey, and then called for a show of -hands by those who were willing to start upon it; every hand was raised. -On March 1st the camp was broken up, and the long western march began. -The Mormons were divided into companies of fifty or sixty wagons, and -every night the cattle were carefully rounded up and guards set to -protect them from attack. From time to time they built more elaborate -camps, and men were left in charge to plant grain, build log cabins, -dig wells, and fence the farms, in order that they might give food and -shelter to other Mormons who would be making the journey later. The -weather was all against their progress. Until May it was bitter cold, -and there were heavy snow-storms, constant rains, sleet, and thick mud -to be fought with, but like many other bands of American pioneers the -Mormons pushed resolutely on, some days marching one mile, some days -six, until May 16th, when they reached a charming spot on a branch of -the Grand River, and built a camp that they called "Mount Pisgah." Here -they plowed and planted several acres of land. While this camp was being -pitched, Brigham Young and some of the other leaders went on to Council -Bluffs and at a place north of Omaha, now the town of Florence, located -the last permanent camp of the expedition. - -The trail of the Mormons now stretched across all the western country. -At each of the camps men, women, and children were living, resting and -preparing supplies to cover the next stage of their journey. But in -spite of the care with which the march was planned those who left Nauvoo -last suffered the most. There was a great deal of sickness among them, -and owing to illness they were often forced to stop for several days at -some unprotected point on the prairies. Twelve thousand people in all -shared that Mormon march. - -The Gentiles in Illinois did not think that the Mormons were leaving -Nauvoo as rapidly as they should. Every week from two to five hundred -Mormon teams crossed the ferry into Iowa, but the neighbors thought that -many meant to stay. Ill feeling against them grew, and a meeting at -Carthage called on people to arm and drive out all Mormons who remained -by mid-June. Six hundred men armed, ready to march against Nauvoo. - -When the Mormons first announced that they meant to leave their -prosperous city in Illinois men came hurrying from other parts of the -country to pick up bargains in houses and farms that they thought they -would find there. Many of these new citizens were as much alarmed at the -threats of the neighbors as were the Mormons themselves; some of them -armed, and asked the governor to send them aid. The men at Carthage grew -very much excited, and started to march on Nauvoo. Word came, however, -that the sheriff, with five hundred men, had entered the city, prepared -to defend it, and the Gentile army retreated. A few weeks afterward the -hostilities broke out again, and seven hundred men with cannon took the -road to the city. - -Those of the Mormons who were left, a few hundreds in number, had built -rude breastworks for protection; some of the Gentile army took these, -and the rest marched through the corn fields, and entered the city on -another side. A battle followed between the Gentiles in the streets and -the Mormons in their houses, and lasted an hour before the Gentiles -withdrew to their camp in the corn fields. - -Peaceful citizens now tried to settle the matter. They arranged that all -the Mormons should leave immediately, and promised to try to protect -them from any further attacks. So matters stood until May 17th, when -the sheriff and his men marched into the city, and found the last of -the Mormons waiting to leave by the ferry. The next day they were told -to go at once, and to make sure that they did bands of armed men went -through the streets, broke into houses, threw what goods were left out -of doors and windows, and actually threatened to shoot the people. -The few remaining Saints, most of them those who had been too ill to -take up the march earlier, were now thoroughly frightened, and before -sundown the last one of them had fled across the Mississippi. A few days -later this last party, six hundred and forty in number, began the long -wearisome journey to the far west, and the empty city of Nauvoo was at -last in the hands of the Gentiles. - -The object of the Mormons was to find a place where they might be free -to live according to their own beliefs. So far they had been continually -hunting for what they called their own City of Zion. As they spent that -winter of 1846-47 in their camp near Council Bluffs, they tried to -decide where they would be safest from persecution. The far west had few -settlements as yet, and they were free to take what land they would, -but the Mormons wanted a site on which to lay the foundations of a city -that should one day be rich and prosperous. They decided to send out a -party of explorers, and in April, 1847, one hundred and forty-three men, -under command of Brigham Young, with seventy-three wagons filled with -food and farm tools, left the headquarters to go still farther west. -They journeyed up the north fork of the Platte River, and in the valleys -found great herds of buffaloes, so many in number that they had to -drive them away before the wagons could pass. Each day the bugle woke -the camp about five o'clock in the morning. At seven the journey began. -The wagons were driven two abreast by men armed with muskets. They were -always prepared for attacks from Indians, but in the whole of their long -journey no red men ever disturbed them. Each night the wagons were drawn -up in a half-circle on the river bank, and the cattle driven into this -shelter. At nine the bugle sent them all to bed. So they made their way -over the Uinta range to Emigration Canyon. Down this canyon they moved, -and presently came to a terrace from which they saw wide plains, watered -by broad rivers, and ahead a great lake filled with little islands. -Three days later the company camped on the plain by the bank of one of -the streams, and decided that this should be the site of their new city. -They held a meeting at which they dedicated the land with religious -ceremonies, and at once set to work to lay off fields and start plowing -and planting. Some of them visited the lake, which they called the Great -Salt Lake, and bathed in its buoyant waters. Day by day more of the -pioneers arrived, and by the end of August they had chosen the site of -their great temple, built log cabins and adobe huts, and christened the -place the "City of the Great Salt Lake." This name was later changed to -Salt Lake City. - -It took some time for this large body of emigrants to build their -homes. Wood was scarce and had to be hauled over bad roads by teams that -were still worn out by the long march, therefore many built houses of -adobe bricks, and as they did not know how to use this clay the rains -and frost caused many of the walls to crumble, and when snow fell the -people stretched cloths under their roofs to protect themselves from -the dripping bricks. Many families lived for months in their wagons. -They would take the top part from the wheels, and setting it on the -ground, divide it into small bedrooms. The furniture was of the rudest -sort; barrels or chests for tables and chairs, and bunks built into -the side of the house for beds. But at last they were free from their -enemies in this distant country. Men in Ohio, Missouri, and Illinois had -hounded them from their settlements, but in this far-off region they -had no neighbors except a few pioneer settlers, and wandering bands of -Indians, who were glad to trade with them. A steady stream of converts -to the Mormon church followed that first trail across the plains. A -missionary sent to England brought many men and women from that country -to the city on the Great Salt Lake. Brigham Young and the other leaders -encouraged their followers above all else to cultivate the land. Most of -the Mormons were farmers, and what shops there were dealt only in the -necessities of life. Food was a matter of the first importance, and they -had to rely entirely upon their own efforts to provide it. Every one was -given a piece of land for his house, and most of them had their own -farms in the outlying country. When they were sure of their food they -began to build their temple and other public buildings, and these, like -their streets, were all planned on the lines of a great future city. -They first called their territory Deseret, but later changed it to the -Indian name of Utah. - -Salt Lake City, and the territory of Utah, of which it was the chief -settlement, might have remained for years almost unknown to the rest -of the United States had not gold been discovered in California in the -winter of 1849. The news of untold riches in the land that lay between -Utah and the Pacific Ocean brought thousands of fortune hunters across -the plains, and many of them traveled by way of Salt Lake City. That -rush of men brought trade in its track and served to make the Mormons' -capital well known. The quest for gold opened up the lands along the -Pacific and helped to tie the far west to the rest of the nation. Soon -railroads began to creep into the valleys beyond the Rocky Mountains, -and wherever they have gone they have brought men closer together. But -in Utah the Mormons were the first settlers, and no one could come and -drive them out of their chosen land. At last they had found a city -entirely of their own. They had not been allowed to live in Nauvoo, and -so they built a new capital. Like all founders of new religions the -Mormons had to weather many storms, but after they had passed through -cold, hunger, and hardships of many kinds they came to their promised -land. - -Such is the story of the founding of Salt Lake City, the home of the -Mormon people. - - - - -VIII - -THE GOLDEN DAYS OF 'FORTY-NINE - - -In 1848 California was largely an unexplored region, the home of certain -old Spanish missions, with a few seaport towns scattered along the -coast. Some pioneers from the East had settled inland after California -had been separated from Mexico, and were ranching and farming. One of -these pioneers, a well-to-do man named John A. Sutter, had staked out -a considerable tract of land near the American River. He built a fort -or stockade as headquarters, and made his plans to cultivate the tract. -He had a number of men working for him, building a sawmill on the south -branch of the American River, about forty miles from his main house. -These workmen were in charge of James Wilson Marshall, who intended to -have a dry channel serve as the tail-race for the mill, and was widening -and deepening it by loosening the earth. At night the water of the -stream was allowed to run through this channel, and wash out the gravel -and sand. One day early in January, as Marshall was walking along the -bank of the race, he noticed some shining yellow flakes in the soil. -He thought these flakes might be gold, and gathering some of the earth -carefully washed and screened it. In this way he obtained what looked -like gold-dust. Early the next morning he went back to the race, and -after some searching found a yellow scale larger than the others. He -showed this, together with those he had obtained the day before, to some -of the workmen, and they helped him to gather about three ounces. Later -in the day Marshall went to his employer Sutter, who was at the fort, -and there the two men tested the flakes as well as they were able, and -reached the conclusion that they were really gold-dust. - -It was important to keep the discovery as quiet as possible. Searching -along the dry channel Sutter and Marshall found more of the gold flakes. -In some places the yellow scales were very plentiful, and seemed to -promise that large quantities of the valuable mineral could be found -near at hand. It was impossible, however, to keep the news from the -workmen who had helped in finding the flakes. Before long the news -spread, and in March, 1848, two newspapers of California mentioned the -discovery on the south fork of the American River. - -The country was so sparsely settled, and life so primitive, that no -great excitement was caused by this news for some months. But in May a -Mormon, coming from the settlement of Coloma to San Francisco, walked -down the main street waving a bottle filled with gold-dust and shouting -"Gold! Gold! Gold from the American River!" - -His words, and the sight of the glittering bottle, caused tremendous -excitement in San Francisco, and in the twinkling of an eye men took -possession of sailboats, sloops, launches, any kind of craft, and -started up the Sacramento River. Those who could not get boats to take -the quicker course hurried off on horses or mules, in wagons or on foot. -It was like a fairy tale. The seaport town of San Francisco, which had -been well filled, was practically deserted overnight. Shopkeepers closed -their stores, families hurried from their houses, and every class of -people pushed toward the American River. The roads that led thither, -which had usually been almost as empty as the prairies, were now filled -with a wildly rushing throng. A man who had crossed the Strait of -Carquines in April was the only passenger on the ferry, but when he -returned two weeks later he found two hundred wagons trying to drive on -board the ferry-boat. - -Business on the coast came to a standstill. The newspapers that had -been started stopped publication. The churches closed, and all the town -officers deserted their posts. As soon as a ship touched the coast and -the crew heard of the finding of gold they deserted, and the captain -and mates, seeing themselves without a crew, usually dashed after the -others. Empty vessels lay at the docks. A large ship belonging to the -Hudson's Bay Company, which had put into San Francisco harbor, was in -charge of the captain's wife, every one else having left for the gold -fields. Prices in all the country from San Francisco to Los Angeles -jumped prodigiously. If men were to stay at their work they demanded -and received twice their former wages. Shovels and spades sold for ten -dollars apiece. They, and a few other mining implements, were the only -things still manufactured. The cry of gold had turned men's heads like -the magic wand of some fairy. - -Inland California presented a strange sight. The roads that ran from San -Francisco to Sutter's Fort had formerly lain between prosperous farm -lands, but now the crops were going to waste, the houses were empty, and -the cattle free to wander through fields of grain. Along the American -River, on the other hand, hills and valleys were filled with sheltering -tents, and huts built of brush and rocks thrown together in a hurry. Men -could not stop for comfort, but worked all day on the river bank. There -were almost as many ways of searching for the gold as there were men. -Some tried to wash the sand and gravel in pans; some used closely woven -Indian baskets; some used what were called cradles. The cradle was a -basket six or eight feet long, mounted on rockers, and open at one end; -at the other end was a coarse screen sieve. Cleats were nailed across -the bottom of the cradle. One workman would dig the gravel from the -river bank, another carry it to the sieve, a third pour water over it, -and a fourth rock the cradle The screen separated the stones from the -gravel, the water washed away the earth and carried the heavier soil out -of the cradle, thus leaving the black sand filled with the gold. This -was later carried to a pan and dried in the sun. The sand could then be -blown away, and the gold would be left. - -Men knew that fortunes were to be found here. On a creek a few miles -below Coloma, seventeen thousand dollars' worth of gold was taken from -a ditch three hundred feet long, four wide, and two deep. Another small -channel had yielded no less than twelve thousand dollars. Many men -already had bags and bottles that held thousands of dollars' worth of -the precious mineral. One man, who had been able to get fifty Indians to -work for him as washers, obtained sixteen thousand dollars from a small -creek in five weeks' time. - -All this quickly changed the character of upper California. Every man -wanted to be a miner, and no longer a cattleman or farmer, as before. It -looked as though the towns would shrivel up, because of the tremendously -high wages demanded by the men who were needed there. Cooks in San -Francisco were paid three hundred dollars a month, and all kinds of -mechanics secured wages of fifteen or twenty dollars a day. The forts -found it impossible to keep soldiers on duty. As soon as men were paid -off they rushed to the American River. Sailors deserted as fast as they -could, and the American war-ships that came to anchor off Monterey did -not dare to allow a single man to land. Threats of punishment or offers -of reward had no influence over the sailors. They all felt certain they -could make fortunes in a month at the gold fields. - -Soon men began to wonder whether they could not duplicate in other -places the discovery that Marshall had made on Sutter's land. Wherever -there was a river or stream explorers began to dig. They were well -rewarded. Rich placers of gold were found along the course of almost all -the streams that flowed to the Feather and San Joaquin Rivers. Along -the course of the Stanislaus and Toulumne Rivers was another field -for mining. By midsummer of 1848 settlers in southern California were -pouring north in thousands, and by October at least ten thousand men -were washing and screening the soil of river banks. - -[Illustration: WHEREVER THERE WAS A STREAM, EXPLORERS BEGAN TO DIG] - -The Pacific coast was very far away from the rest of the United States -in that day. News usually traveled by ship, and sailors brought the -report of the discovery of gold to Honolulu, to Oregon City, and to the -ports at Victoria and Vancouver. Letters carried the first tidings to -the people in the East, and by the middle of the summer Washington and -New York had learned what was happening in California, and adventurers -along the Atlantic coast were beginning to turn their faces westward. -The letters often greatly exaggerated the truth. A New York paper -printed reports which stated that men were picking gold out of the earth -as easily as hogs could root up groundnuts in a forest. One man, who -employed sixty Indians, was said to be making a dollar a minute. -Small holes along the banks of streams were stated to yield many pounds -of gold. But even allowing for much exaggeration it was evident that men -were making fortunes in that country. - -Colonel Mason, in charge at San Francisco, sent Lieutenant Loeser with -his report to Washington. The lieutenant had to take a roundabout -route. He went from Monterey to Peru, from there to Panama, across the -Isthmus, took boat to Jamaica, and from there he sailed to New Orleans. -When he reached the capital he delivered his message, and showed a -small tea chest which held three thousand dollars' worth of gold in -lumps and flakes. This chest was placed on exhibition, and served to -convince those who saw it that California must possess more gold than -any other country yet discovered. President Taylor announced the news -in an official message. He said that the mineral had been found in such -quantities as could hardly be believed, except on the word of government -officers in the field. During the winter of 1848-49 thousands of men in -the East planned to start for this El Dorado as soon as they could get -their outfits together, and spring should open the roads. - -The overland route to the West was long and very difficult. At that -time, though the voyage by sea was longer, it was easier for men who -lived on the Atlantic coast. They might sail around Cape Horn, or to the -Isthmus of Panama, or to Vera Cruz, and in the two latter cases cross -land, and hope to find some ship in the western ocean that would take -them to San Francisco. Business men in the East seized the opportunity -to advertise tents, beds, blankets, and all manner of camp equipment, -as well as pans, rockers, and every kind of implement for washing gold -from the gravel. The owners of ships of every description, many of them -unseaworthy, fitted up their craft, and advertised them as ready to sail -for San Francisco. The ports of Boston, Salem, Newburyport, New York, -Baltimore, and New Orleans were crowded with brigs and schooners loading -for the Pacific. A newspaper in New York stated that ten thousand people -would leave for the gold country within a month. - -All sorts of schemes were tried. Companies were formed, each member -of which paid one hundred dollars or more to charter a ship to take -them around the Horn. Almost every town in the East had its California -Association, made up of adventurers who wanted to make their fortunes -rapidly. By the end of January, 1849, eighty vessels had sailed by way -of Cape Horn, and many others were heading for Vera Cruz, and for ports -on the Isthmus of Panama. The newspapers went on printing fabulous -stories of the discoveries. One had a letter stating that lumps of gold -weighing a pound had been found in several places. Another printed -a letter from a man who said he would return in a few months with a -fortune of half a million dollars in gold. A miner was said to have -arrived in Pittsburgh with eighty thousand dollars in gold-dust that he -had gathered in a few weeks. Whenever men met they discussed eagerly the -one absorbing topic of the fortunes waiting on the coast. - -The adventurers who sailed around Cape Horn had in most cases the -easiest voyages. There were plenty of veteran sea-captains ready to -command the ships. A Boston merchant organized "The Mining and Trading -Company," bought a full-rigged vessel, sold places in it to one hundred -and fifty men, and sailed from Boston early in January, 1849. The -first place at which she touched was Tierra del Fuego, and she reached -Valparaiso late in April. There she found two ships from Baltimore, and -in two days four more arrived from New York, and one from Boston. July -6th she entered the Golden Gate of San Francisco, and found it crowded -with vessels from every port. The ships were all deserted, and within an -hour all this ship's crew were on shore. The town itself was filled with -bustle and noise. Gambling was practically the only business carried on, -and the stores were jammed with men paying any price for outfits for the -gold country. This company chose a place on the Mokelumne River, and -hastened there, but they found it difficult to work on a company basis. -The men soon scattered and drifted to other camps; some of them found -gold, others in time made their way east poorer than when they came. - -Those who went by the Isthmus had many adventures. Two hundred young -men sailed to Vera Cruz, and landed at that quaint old Mexican city. -There they were told that bands of robbers were prowling all through the -country, that their horses would die of starvation in the mountains, -and that they would probably be killed, or lose themselves on the wild -trail. Fifty of them decided not to go farther, and sailed back in a -homeward-bound ship to New York. Those who went on were attacked by a -mob at the town of Jalapa, and had to fight their way through at the -point of revolvers. In several wild passes bandits tried to hold them -up, but the Easterners put them to flight and pushed on their way. All -through the country they found relics and wreckage of the recent days -when General Scott had marched an army into Mexico. - -There was more trouble at Mexico City. A religious procession was -passing along the plaza, and the Americans did not fall upon their -knees. The crowd set upon them, and they had to form a square for their -protection, and hold the mob at bay until Mexican officers came to their -rescue. Only after fighting a path through other towns and a long march -did they reach the seaport of San Blas. One hundred and twenty of them -took ship from there to San Francisco. Thirty, however, had left the -others at Mexico City, thinking they could reach the sea-coast more -quickly by another route. The ship they caught could get no farther -than San Diego. From there they had to march on foot across a blazing -desert country. Their food gave out, and they lived on lizards, birds, -rattlesnakes, and even buzzards, anything they could find. Worn and -almost starving they reached San Francisco, ten months after they had -left New York. Such adventures were common to the American Argonauts of -1849. - -Those gold-seekers who went by the Isthmus of Panama had to stop at the -little settlement of Chagres, where one hundred huts of bamboo stood on -the ruins of the old Spanish fort of San Lorenzo. The natives, lazy and -half-clad, gazed in astonishment at the scores of men from the eastern -United States, who suddenly began to hurry through their town. Here the -gold-hunters bargained for river boats, which were usually rude dugouts, -with roofs made of palmetto branches and leaves, and rowed by natives. -It was impossible with such rowers to make much speed against the strong -current of the Chagres River. Three days were required to make the -journey to Gorgona, where the travelers usually landed. At this place -they had to bargain afresh for pack-mules to carry them the twenty-four -miles that lay between Gorgona and Panama. Many men, who could not find -any mules left in the town, deserted their baggage and started for the -Pacific coast on foot. The chances were that no ship would be waiting -for them there, and they would have to warm their heels in idleness for -days. - -General Persifor F. Smith, who had been ordered to take command of the -United States troops at San Francisco, was one of those who had to -wait for a ship at Panama. Here he heard reports that a good deal of -the new-found gold was being sent to foreign countries. Some said that -the British Consul had forwarded fifteen thousand ounces of California -gold to England, and that more than nine million francs' worth of the -mineral had been received in the South American ports of Lima and -Valparaiso. As a result hundreds of men from those ports were taking -ship to California. General Smith did not like the idea of foreigners -profiting by the discovery of gold in California, and issued an order -that only citizens of the United States should be allowed to enter the -public lands where the diggings were located. When the _California_, -a steamship from New York, reached Panama in January, 1849, with -seventy-five Peruvians on board, General Smith warned them that they -would not be allowed to go to the mines, and sent word of this order -to consuls along the Pacific coast of South America. In spite of his -efforts, however, foreigners would go to Upper California, and the -American prospectors were too busy with their own searches to prevent -the strangers from taking what gold they could find. - -When the _California_ arrived at Panama she was already well filled -with passengers, but there were so many men waiting for her that the -captain had to give in to their demands, and crowd his vessel with -several hundred more gold-seekers. Loaded with impatient voyagers, the -steamship sailed up the coast, and reached San Francisco about the end -of February. Immediately every one on board, except the captain, the -mate, and the purser, deserted the ship, and dashed for the gold fields. -The next steamer to reach Panama, the _Oregon_, found an even larger -crowd waiting at that port. She took more passengers on board than she -was intended to carry, but fortune favored the gold-seekers, and the -_Oregon_, like the _California_, discharged her adventurous cargo in -safety at San Francisco. Hundreds of others who could not board either -of these steamers ventured on the Pacific in small sailing vessels, or -any manner of ship that would put out from Panama bound north. - -It is interesting to know the story of some of these pilgrimages. One of -the Argonauts has told how he organized, in a little New England town, -a company of twenty men. Each man subscribed a certain sum of money in -return for a share in any profits, and in this way ten thousand dollars -was raised. The men who were to go on the expedition signed a paper -agreeing to work at least two years in the gold fields for the company. -The band went from the New England town to New York, where they found -the harbor filled with ships that were advertised to sail for Nicaragua, -Vera Cruz, or Chagres. The leader of the company chose a little brig -bound for the latter port, and in this the party, with some twenty-five -other passengers, set sail in March. They ran into a heavy storm, but -in three weeks reached the port on the Isthmus. There they had to wait -some days, as all the river boats had gone up to Gorgona. When the boats -were ready, thirty natives poled ten dugouts up the river. When the men -landed they were told that there was no ship at Panama; that half the -gold-seekers in that town were ill, and that there was no use in pushing -on. So the party built tents on the bank of the river, and stayed there -until the rainy season drove them to the coast. There they camped again, -and waited for a ship to arrive. There was one vessel anchored in the -harbor, but the owner was under a bond to keep it there as a coal-ship. -The leader of the company, however, persuaded the owner to forfeit this -bond, and four hundred waiting passengers paid two hundred dollars -apiece to be conveyed to California. The ship was hardly seaworthy, -and took seven weeks of sailing and floating to reach the harbor of -Acapulco. There the vessel was greeted by a band of twenty Americans, -ragged and penniless, who had come on foot from the City of Mexico. They -had waited so long for a ship that twenty of the passengers agreed to -give them their tickets, and take their places to wait until the next -vessel should arrive. It was almost seven months after that New England -party had left New York before they arrived at the Golden Gate of San -Francisco. - -There was very little choice between the Panama and the Nicaragua routes -to the West. Among those who tried the latter road were a number of -young men who had just graduated from Yale College. They boarded a -ship in New York that was advertised to sail during the first week in -February, and expected to land in San Francisco in sixty days. It was -March, however, before the ship, crowded with voyagers, set sail south -from Sandy Hook. Three weeks brought her to the mouth of the San Juan -River. The ship's company was landed at the little tropical town of San -Juan de Nicaragua. A small steamboat had been brought along to take them -up the river, but when the machinery was put together the boat was found -to be worthless. Like the voyagers by Panama, these men then had to -trust to native dugouts, and in this way they finally got up the river -to San Carlos. Had it not been for their eagerness to reach California -such a trip would have been a delight to men who had never seen the -tropics before. The San Juan River flowed through forests of strange -and beautiful trees. Tamarind and dyewood trees, tall palms, and giant -cacti, festooned with bright-colored vines, made a background for the -brilliant birds that flew through the woods. Fruit was to be had for the -taking, and the weather at that time of the year was delightful. But the -thought of the fortunes waiting to be picked up in California filled the -minds of most of the travelers. - -After leaving the boats this party traveled by mule to Leon. Nicaragua -was in the midst of a revolution, and the Americans acted as a guard -to the President on the road to Leon. Near the end of July the company -separated. Some finally sailed from the port of Realejo, and after many -dangers and a voyage of almost five months succeeded in reaching San -Francisco. Others reached Panama, set sail in a small boat, and were -never heard from again; while yet a third party boarded a vessel at a -Nicaraguan port, and managed to reach California after almost perishing -from hunger and thirst. - -Such were the adventures of some of those who tried to reach the gold -fields of the West by sea. Hundreds of men made the trip by one of these -routes, and as soon as spring arrived thousands set out overland. It was -understood that large parties would leave from western Missouri early -in March, and as a result many men, some alone, some in bands of twenty -or thirty, gathered there from all parts of the East. Sometimes they -formed military companies, wore uniforms, and carried rifles. The main -place of gathering was the town of Independence, which grew to the size -of a large city in a few weeks. Men came on foot and on horseback; some -with canvas-covered wagons, prairie schooners, and pack-mules; some with -herds of cattle; some bringing with them all their household goods. All -the Middle West seemed to be in motion. In a single week in March, 1849, -hundreds of wagons drove through Burlington, Iowa. Two hundred from -Memphis went along the Arkansas River, and hundreds more from Michigan, -Wisconsin, Illinois, and Pennsylvania crossed the border of Iowa. - -The spring was late, and as the overland trip could not be taken until -the grass was high enough to feed the cattle, the great company had to -wait along the frontiers from Independence to Council Bluffs. As men -gathered at these towns they would form into companies, and then move -on to a more distant point, in order to make room for later arrivals. -Twenty thousand gathered along these frontiers before the signal was -given to start westward. The march began about May 1st, and from then -on, day and night, scores of wagons crossed the Missouri River, and the -country looked like a field of tents. - -From Independence most of the emigrants crossed rolling prairies for -fifteen days to the Platte River at Grand Island. The route then wound -up the valley of the Platte to the South Fork, and from there to the -North Fork, where a rude post-office had been built, at which letters -might be left to be carried back east by any travelers who were going -in that direction. From here the emigrants journeyed to the mountain -passes. They usually stopped at Laramie, which was the farthest western -fort of the United States. By this time the long journey would be -telling on many of the companies, and the road be strewn with all sorts -of household goods, thrown away in order to lighten the burden on the -horses. - -At the South Pass, midway of the Rocky Mountains, two roads divided; -those who took the southern road traveled by the Great Salt Lake to -the Sierra Nevada Mountains, and so into California. The northern road -lay partly along the course of the Snake River to the headwaters of the -Humboldt, and from there the emigrants might choose a path still farther -to the north toward the Columbia River, or westward to the Sacramento. -Many went by the trail along the Humboldt, although this route was one -of the most difficult. "The river had no current," said one of the -gold-hunters. "No fish could live in its waters, which wound through -a desert, and there was not enough wood in the whole valley to make a -snuff-box, nor vegetation enough on its banks to shelter a rabbit. The -stream flowed through desert sands, which the summer heat made almost -unbearable for men and horses." Following its course the travelers came -to a lake of mud, surrounded for miles by a sandy plain. Across this -they had to march for thirty-four hours to reach the Carson River. Along -the trail lay the bodies of horses, mules, and oxen, and broken wagons -parched and dried out in the blazing sun. - -The first of the overland travelers who crossed the mountains late in -the summer brought such reports to the officers at the Pacific posts -that the latter decided that relief parties must be sent back to help -those who were still toiling in the desert. It was known that some had -been attacked by Indians, and obliged to leave their covered wagons; -that some had lost all their cattle, and were almost without food. -Therefore relief parties were hurried into the mountains from the -western side. They found the overland trail crowded with men on foot and -in wagons. Many were sick, and almost all were hungry. One man carried -a child in his arms, while a little boy trudged by his side, and his -invalid wife rode on a mule. The soldiers gave food to all who needed -it, and urged them to push on to the army posts. Day after day they met -the same stream of emigrants, all bent on reaching the golden fields of -California. - -Late in the autumn, with winter almost at hand, the voyagers were still -crossing the deserts and mountains. The soldiers could not induce many -of them to throw away any of their goods. They crept along slowly, their -wagons loaded from baseboard to roof. The teams, gradually exhausted, -began to fall, and progress was almost impossible. Then the rescuers -hurried the women to near-by settlements, and forced the men to abandon -some of their baggage in an effort to reach shelter before the winter -storms should come. By the end of November almost all the overland -emigrants had crossed the mountains. - -[Illustration: THE TEAMS, EXHAUSTED, BEGAN TO FAIL] - -The city of San Francisco had sprung up almost overnight. In 1835 a -Captain Richardson had landed on the shore of Yerba Buena Cove, and -built a hut of four redwood posts, covered by a sail. Five years -afterward this village of Yerba Buena contained about fifty people and -a dozen houses. In 1846 the American war-ship _Portsmouth_ anchored -there, and her captain raised the "Stars and Stripes" on the Plaza. At -that time there were not more than fifty houses and two hundred people. -When the town became American the Plaza was renamed Portsmouth Square, -and a year later the settlement was christened San Francisco. That was -in January, 1847; and by midsummer of 1849 the town had become a city. -It was an odd place to look at. The houses were made of rough unpainted -boards, with cotton nailed across the walls and ceiling in place of -plaster; and many a thriving business was carried on in canvas tents. -There were few homes. The city was crowded; but most of the population -did not intend to stay. They came to buy what they needed, or sell what -they brought with them, and then hasten away to the mines. So many eager -strangers naturally drove the prices up enormously, especially when -it seemed as though gold could be had for the taking. The restaurants -charged three dollars for a cup of coffee, a slice of ham, and two eggs. -Houses and lots sold for from ten thousand to seventy-five thousand -dollars each, and everything else was in proportion. What happened in -San Francisco also happened in many other California towns. Sacramento -was the result of the gold-craze. Speculators bought large tracts of -land in any attractive place, gave it a high-sounding name, and sold -city lots. Many of these so-called cities, however, shriveled up -within a year or two. The seaports flourished because they were the -gateways through which the newcomers passed in their rush to locate in -the gold country. - -These seaports became the goal of merchants everywhere. Necessary -articles were so scarce that they were shipped long distances. Flour -was brought from Australia and Chili, rice and sugar from China, and -the cities along the Atlantic provided the dry-goods, the tools, -and the furniture. At one time a cotton shirt would sell for forty -dollars, a tin pan for nine, and a candle for three. But on the other -hand cargoes of goods that were not needed, silks and satins, costly -house-furnishings, were left on the beaches and finally sold for a song. - -From the seaports the new arrivals hurried either up the Sacramento and -the Feather Rivers to the northern gold fields, or up the San Joaquin -to the southern country. Usually they were guided by the latest story -of a rich find, and went where the chances seemed best. Several men -would join forces and pitch their tents together, naming their camp -Rat-trap Slide, Rough and Ready Camp, Slap-jack Bar, Mad Mule Gulch, -Git-up-and-Git, You Bet, or any other name that struck their fancy. -There were no laws to govern these little settlements, and the men -adopted a rough system of justice that suited themselves. But as the -numbers increased it was evident that California must have a better -form of government, and steps were taken to have that rich stretch of -land along the Pacific admitted as a state to the United States. - -In three years California had grown from the home of about two thousand -people to the home of eighty thousand. The finding of gold had changed -that almost unknown wilderness into a thriving land in the twinkling of -an eye. Railroads were built to reach it, and more and more men poured -west. Some men made great fortunes, but more in a few months abandoned -their claims and drifted to the cities, or made their way slowly back -to the eastern farms and villages from which they had set out. The -Forty-niners, as the gold-seekers were called, found plenty of adventure -in California, even if they did not all find a short-cut to wealth. - - - - -IX - -HOW THE UNITED STATES MADE FRIENDS WITH JAPAN - - -One of the beautiful names that the Japanese have given to their country -is "Land of Great Peace," and at no time was this name more appropriate -than in the middle of the nineteenth century. Two hundred years before -the last of the civil wars of Japan had come to an end, and the people, -weary of years of bloodshed, had turned delightedly to peaceful ways. -The rice-fields were replanted, artisans returned to their crafts, -shops opened again, and poets and painters followed the call of their -arts. The samurai, or warriors, sheathed their swords, though they -still regarded them as their very souls. They hung their armor in their -ancestral halls, and spent their time in sport or idleness. The daimios, -or nobles of Japan, lived either in the city of Yedo or at their country -houses, taking their ease, and gradually forgetting the arts of war on -which their power had been founded. All the people were quite contented, -and had no desire to trade with the rest of the world. As a matter of -fact they knew almost nothing about other countries, except through -English or Russian sailors who occasionally landed on their coasts. -Japan was satisfied to be a hermit nation. - -On the afternoon of the seventh day of July, 1853, or the third day of -the sixth month of Kayéi, in the reign of the Emperor Koméi, the farmers -working in the muddy rice-fields near the village of Uraga saw a strange -sight. It was a clear summer afternoon, and the beautiful mountain Fuji, -its cone wreathed in white clouds, could be seen from sea and shore. -What startled the men in the fields, the people in the village, and the -boatmen in the harbor, was a fleet of vessels coming to anchor in the -bay of Yedo. These monsters, with their sails furled, although they were -heading against the wind, were shooting tongues of smoke from their -great black throats. "See the fire-vessels!" cried the Japanese to each -other. When the peasants asked the priests where the monsters came from -the wise men answered that they were the fire-vessels of the barbarians -who lived in the West. - -The monsters were four ships of the United States navy, the -_Mississippi_, _Susquehanna_, _Plymouth_, and _Saratoga_, all under -command of Commodore Matthew Calbraith Perry. The fleet dropped anchor -in the wide bay, forming a line broadside to the shore. The gun-ports -were opened, and sentries set to guard against attack by pirates, or -by fire-junks. As the anchors splashed in the water rockets shot up -from one of the forts on shore signaling to the court at Yedo that the -barbarians had reached Japan. - -The town of Uraga was usually not a very busy place, and the government -officers spent their time drinking tea, smoking, and lounging in the -sun, and occasionally collecting custom duties from junks bound to other -harbors. But there was a great bustle on the day the strange ships -arrived. The chief magistrate, or buni[=o], his interpreter, and suite -of attendants, put on their formal dress of hempen cloth, and fastened -their lacquered ornamented hats to their heads; with two swords in each -belt, the party marched to the shore and boarded their state barge. -Twelve oarsmen rowed it to the nearest foreign ship, but when they -tried to fasten ropes to the vessel so that they might go on board, the -barbarians threw off the ropes, and gestured to them to keep away. - -The Japanese officer was surprised to find that, although he was -gorgeously robed, and his companions carried spears and the Tokugawa -trefoil flag, the barbarians were not at all impressed. They told him, -through an interpreter, that their commander wished to confer with the -governor himself. The officer answered that the governor was not allowed -to board foreign ships. After some further discussion the surprised -Japanese was permitted to climb the gangway ladder and meet the -barbarians on the deck of their vessel. - -Commodore Perry knew that the Japanese loved mystery, high-sounding -names, and ceremonies, and so he stayed in his cabin and would not show -himself to the visitors. A secretary carried his messages, and explained -that the mysterious commodore had come on a friendly mission and bore -a letter from the President of the United States to the Emperor of -Japan, which he wished to present with all proper ceremony. He declined -to go to Nagasaki, and insisted that he should remain in Yedo Bay, -and added that although his visit was entirely friendly, he would not -allow any inquisitive sightseers to prowl about his fleet. Very much -impressed with the power of this hidden barbarian, the Japanese officer -immediately ordered all the small boats, the punts and sampans that had -gathered about the fleet, to row away. - -The officer and his body-guard returned to shore, and told the villagers -that the visitors were very remarkable men, who were not at all -impressed by their costumes or weapons. The Japanese had no such title -as commodore in their language, and they referred to Perry as Admiral, -and credited him with almost as much majesty as their own hidden Mikado, -or as the mighty Shogun. - -The western coast of Japan was much excited that night. Rockets from the -forts, and huge watch-fires on the cliffs, told the whole country that -a most unusual event had happened. The peasants set out their sacred -images, and prayed to them as they had not done in years. It was evident -that the gods of Japan were punishing the people for their neglect -by sending these great fire-vessels to disturb the coast. To add to -the general excitement a wonderful light appeared in the sky about -midnight, spreading a pale red and blue path across the heavens, as -though a dragon were flying through space. Priests and soothsayers made -the most of this display of Northern Lights, and pointed out that the -fire-vessels, clearly revealed in the harbor, must have something to do -with the strange omen. - -The governor of Uraga himself, with a retinue of servants, all clad in -embroidered gowns and lacquered helmets, and each carrying two swords, -went out to the flag-ship next morning. He had evidently overlooked -the fact that the barbarians had been told on the day before that -the governor could not pay such a visit to their fleet. The governor -was used to being received with a great deal of attention, and to -having people bow to the ground as he went by; but on the deck of the -_Susquehanna_ the sailors looked at him with simple curiosity, and when -he asked to speak with the mysterious admiral, he was told that he -would only be allowed to speak with the captains. These men said that -their commander would only wait three days for an answer from Yedo as -to whether the Mikado would receive the letter of the President. They -showed him the magnificent box that held the letter, and the governor's -curiosity grew even greater. When he left the flag-ship he had promised -to urge the Americans' cause. - -Next day, the men dressed in silk and brocade, painted helmets, and -gleaming sashes, eager to visit the ships again, were surprised to learn -that the barbarian prince would transact no business. His interpreter -declared that it was a day of religious observance, known as Sunday. -The people on shore heard the sailors of the fleet singing hymns, -a strange sound in those waters. Hastily the Japanese offered new -presents at the shrines of their own gods to ensure protection from the -barbarians. 8 By now the hermit people thought they might have to guard -themselves, and began to build earthworks along the shore. Farmers, -fishermen, shopkeepers, women, and children were pressed into service. -Rude embankments were thrown up, and enormously heavy brass cannon -were placed at openings. The old samurai, who had almost forgotten -warfare, sought out their weapons, and gathered their troops. Their -armor consisted of jackets of silk, iron and paper. Their arms were old -matchlocks and spears. They could have fought each other, but they were -several hundred years behind the barbarians in military matters. On -the hills they set up canvas tents, with flags bearing flaming dragons -and the other emblems of their clans. In the days of their civil wars -bright-colored trappings had played an important part. - -Yedo was then the chief city of Japan. When Perry arrived in 1853 it -was the home of the Shogun Iyéyoshi, who was the real ruler of the -land, although the Mikado was called the sovereign. Yedo had been the -home of a long line of Shoguns of the Tokugawa family who had ruled -the country, calling themselves "Tycoons." They had built up the city, -and filled it with palaces and temples that had never been equaled in -magnificence. The people of Yedo, numbering over a million, were greatly -excited when they heard of the fleet of war-ships lying in their great -bay. The Shogun, his courtiers and his warriors bestirred themselves at -once. Soldiers were summoned, armor polished, swords unsheathed, castles -repaired, and everything possible done to make an impression on the -strangers. - -The chief men knew that they could not oppose this foreign admiral. Once -they had had war-vessels of their own, but years of peace had reduced -their navy, and they could not defend their coasts. The Shogun was -afraid that the admiral might insist upon seeing the Mikado at Ki[=o]to, -and that would be a great blow to his own dignity. After hours of -debate and discussion he chose two daimios to receive the letter of the -American President, Millard Fillmore, and sent word to all coast towns -to man their forts. - -Perry had played the game well, and so far had allowed no Japanese -to see him. He wanted to make a treaty with Japan, and he knew that -to succeed he must impress this Oriental people with his dignity. He -allowed his captains and two daimios to arrange a meeting to be held -at a little town called Kurihâma, near the port of Uraga. Each side -had tried to outdo the other in politeness. The American captains had -received the Japanese officers with great respect, had served them -wines, and seated them in upholstered armchairs. The Japanese regretted -that they could not provide their guests with armchairs or with wine on -shore, but the visitors assured them that they would be willing to adopt -Japanese customs. - -By July 13th the scene for the meeting was ready. Hundreds of yards of -canvas, with the Tokugawa trefoil, had been stretched along the road to -Kurihâma. Hundreds of retainers, clad in all the colors of their feudal -days, were gathered about the tents, and on the beach stood as many -soldiers, glittering in their lacquered armor. The American officers -were almost as brilliantly dressed as the Japanese. They wore coats -with a great many bright brass buttons, and curious shaped hats cocked -on their heads. They brought musicians with them who played on cornets -and drums, and the music was quite unlike anything the natives had ever -heard before. Three hundred of the barbarians landed and marched from -the beach to the main tent, while the eager-eyed people lined the road -and wondered at their strange appearance. - -Two or three big sailors carried the American flag, and back of them -came two boys with the mysterious red box that had been shown to the -officers of the port. Back of them marched the great commodore, clad in -full uniform, and on either side of him strode a black man armed with a -large sabre. Many of the Japanese had never seen a white man before, and -still fewer had ever looked upon a negro. They were therefore very much -impressed by the procession. - -The officers of the Shogun received their magnificent visitor at the -door of the pavilion. After greetings the two boys handed the box to the -negro guards, who opened the scarlet cloth envelope and the gold-hinged -rosewood cases, and laid the President's letter on a lacquered stand -brought from Yedo. A receipt for the President's letter was then handed -to the commodore, who said that he would return to Japan the next -spring, probably in April or May. The meeting lasted half an hour, and -then, with the same pomp and ceremony, the Americans returned to their -ships. - -For eight days the fleet remained in the bay. One party of sailors -landed, but made no trouble, and was actually so polite that the -people offered them refreshments of tea and fruit. At close range the -barbarians were not so terrifying as the natives had thought them at -first, and when they embarked for their fleet the people urged them to -come back again. On July 17th the war-ships steamed away, leaving the -cliffs covered with people, who gazed in astonishment at vessels that -had no canvas spread, but were driven entirely by fire. - -Perry's object in visiting Japan was to obtain a treaty that would allow -trade relations between the United States and this hermit nation. He -wanted to give the Japanese people time to consider President Fillmore's -letter, and so he planned to keep his squadron in Eastern waters until -the following spring, when he would return to learn the result of his -mission at Yedo. There was much of interest to him in China, and he -spent the autumn and part of the winter making charts of that coast, and -visiting ports where American merchants were already established. - -Meantime the letter of the American President had caused great -excitement in Japan. Almost as soon as Perry left a messenger was sent -to the Shinto priests at the shrines of Isé to offer prayers for the -peace of the empire, and to urge that the barbarians be swept away. A -week later the Shogun Iyéyoshi died, and left the government at odds as -to what to do. - -Some of the daimios remembered the military ardor of their ancestors, -and wanted to fight the barbarians, rather than make a treaty with -them. Others thought that it would be madness to oppose an enemy who -had such powerful ships that they could capture all the Japanese junks, -and destroy the coast cities. One powerful nobleman declared that it -would be well for Japan to meet the barbarians, and learn from them -how to build ships and lead armies, so that they would be able in time -to defeat them at their own arts. The Mikado had little to do in the -discussion. The actual ruler was the new Shogun Iyésada, son of the -former Shogun. - -While Commodore Perry was cruising along the coast of China he heard -that French and Russian merchants were planning to visit Japan. He was -afraid that his country might lose the benefits of his visit unless -he could obtain a treaty before these other countries did. Therefore, -although a midwinter cruise to Japan was difficult and dangerous, he -determined to risk this and return at once. Four ships set sail for Yedo -Bay February 1, 1854, and a week later the commodore followed with three -others. - -In the city of Yedo the new Shogun was very busy preparing either for -peace or war. A long line of forts was hurriedly built on the edge of -the bay in front of the city. Thousands of laborers were kept at work -there, a great number of cannon were cast, and shops worked day and -night turning out guns and ammunition. An old law had directed that all -vessels of a certain size were to be burned, and only small coasting -junks built. This law was repealed, and all the rich daimios hurriedly -built war-ships. These ships flew a flag representing a red sun on a -white background, and this later became the national flag of Japan. A -native who had learned artillery from the Dutch was put in charge of the -soldiers; old mediæval methods of fighting were abandoned, and artillery -that was somewhat like that of European countries was adopted. - -In spite of all this bustle and preparation, however, the Shogun and his -advisers thought it would be wisest for them to agree to a treaty with -the United States. Therefore a notice was issued on December 2, 1853, -which stated that "owing to want of military efficiency, the Americans -would, on their return, be dealt with peaceably." At the same time the -old practice of Fumi-yé, which consisted in trampling on the cross and -other emblems of Christianity, and which had been long practiced in the -city of Nagasaki, was abolished. - -Some men in the country were insisting that the time had come for the -Japanese to visit the West, and learn the new arts and trades. One of -these was a scholar, Sakuma, who urged the government to send Japanese -youths to Europe to learn shipbuilding and navigation. The Shogun did -not approve of this idea; but a pupil of the scholar, named Yoshida -Shoin, heard of it, and decided to go abroad by himself. Sakuma gave him -money for his expenses, and advised him how he might get passage on one -of the American ships, when the fleet should return to Japan. - -As soon as the Shogun learned that Commodore Perry was about to return -he chose Hayâshi, the chief professor of Chinese in the university, -to serve as interpreter. The Americans had used Chinese scholars in -their communications with the Japanese, and Hayâshi was a man of great -learning and courtly manners. The Shogun also found a native who -understood English, although the Americans did not know this. This man, -Nakahama Manjiro, with two companions, had been picked up at sea by an -American captain, and taken to the United States, where he obtained a -good education. He and his two mates then decided that they would return -to their native land, and went to Hawaii, where they built a whale-boat, -and then sailed for the coast of China on board an American merchantman. -In time the wanderers reached home, and when the Shogun heard of -Manjiro's travels he made him a samurai, or wearer of two swords. The -whale-boat that he had built was used as a model for others, and the -traveler taught his friends some of the knowledge of the Western people. - -On February 11, 1854, the watchmen on the hills of Idzu saw the American -fleet approaching. Two days later the great war-ships of the barbarians -steamed up the bay. The seven vessels dropped anchor not far from -Yokos[)u]ka, and the captain of the flag-ship received visits from the -governor and his interpreters. Again the same exaggerated forms of -politeness were observed, and presents of many kinds, fruits, wines, and -confectionery, were exchanged. The Japanese suggested that Perry should -land and meet them at Kamakura or Uraga, but the commodore replied, -through his captain, that he should stay where he was until the Japanese -had decided what they would do. He gave them until February 21st to -decide about the treaty. - -Boats were sent out from the fleet daily to make surveys of the bay, but -none of the crews were allowed to land. At length the Japanese stated -that they were ready to treat with the American officers, and Captain -Adams was sent to Uraga to inspect the place where the fleet was to -anchor, and the new building in which the treaty was to be signed. The -captain, with his aides, entered the hall of reception, and was met by -a daimio named Izawa. The daimio was fond of joking. After many polite -greetings Captain Adams handed the nobleman a note from Commodore Perry. -Izawa took out his great spectacles, but before he put them on he folded -up his large fan with a loud snap. The Americans, alarmed at the noise, -clapped their hands to their revolvers. Izawa could not help laughing at -their confusion, but quickly adjusted his spectacles, and after reading -the note, said that he was much gratified at the commodore's greeting. -Rice and tea, cake and oranges were served the guests. A long argument -followed. Captain Adams said that the building was large enough for -simple talking, but not for the display of presents; and that Commodore -Perry would much rather go to the city of Yedo. The Japanese answered -that they much preferred that the meeting should take place at Uraga or -Kanagawa. The debate, carried on through Chinese interpreters, was a -lengthy one. - -Two days later the commodore moved his fleet ten miles farther up the -bay. From here his crews could see the great temple-roofs, castles, and -pagodas of Yedo itself, and could hear the bells in the city towers. -This advance of the fleet convinced the Shogun that Perry meant to go to -Yedo. Some of his court had thought that it would be a national disgrace -if the barbarians were permitted to enter that city, but the government -now decided to yield the point, and suggested a place directly opposite, -at Yokohama, for the place of treaty. - -No such scene had ever been witnessed in the hermit land of Japan as -the one that took place there on the morning of March 8, 1854. The bay -of Yedo was covered with great state barges and junks with many-colored -sails. On shore were hundreds of soldiers, the servants of the great -daimios, dressed in the gorgeous costumes of earlier centuries. Held -back by ropes were thousands of country people who had gathered from all -over that part of Japan to see the strange men from the West. Everywhere -was color. Tents, banners, houses, and the costumes of men, women and -children blazed with it. The American sailors in all their voyages in -the East had never seen such a brilliant picture. - -Perry was not to be outdone. His men left the ships to the noise of -cannon that echoed and re-echoed along the shore. Twenty-seven boats -brought five hundred men, and as soon as they landed the marines formed -a hollow square, while three bands played martial music. The great -commodore, now looked upon by the Japanese with awe, embarked from the -_Powhatan_ in his white gig; more guns were fired; more flags waved; and -with great pomp, Perry landed on the beach. His object was to impress -the hermit people with the dignity of his nation. - -A number of meetings followed before the treaty was completed. The -Americans insisted that vessels in need of wood, coal, water, or -provisions should be allowed to get them from shore, and that the -Japanese should care for shipwrecked sailors. They also wanted the two -ports, Shimoda and Hakodate, opened to them. The Japanese were willing, -provided they would not travel inland farther than they could return the -same day, and that no American women should be brought into the country. -But when the Japanese objected to the arrival of women, Commodore Perry -threw back his cloak and exclaimed, "Great heavens, if I were to permit -any such stipulation as that in the treaty, when I got home the women -would pull out all the hairs of my head!" The Japanese were surprised at -Perry's excitement, thinking that they must have offended him greatly. -When the interpreters explained what he had actually said, however, both -sides laughed and continued peacefully. They grew more and more friendly -as the meetings progressed. They dined together and exchanged gifts. -The Americans liked the sugared fruits, candied nuts, crabs, prawns, -and fish that the Japanese served in different forms, while the hermit -people developed a great fondness for the puddings and champagne the -Americans offered them. When it came to gifts, the eyes of the Japanese -opened wide at the many surprising things the barbarians had invented. -They were delighted with the rifles, the clocks, the stoves, the -sewing-machines, the model of a steam locomotive, and the agricultural -tools, scales, maps, and charts that Perry had brought to the Mikado. -These presents were to open the minds of the Japanese to the march of -progress in the rest of the world; and to teach them the uses of steam -and electricity, the printing-press, newspapers, and all the other -inventions that were products of Europe and America. - -In exchange, the art-loving people of Japan gave their visitors -beautiful works in bronze, lacquer, porcelain, bamboo, ivory, silk, and -paper, and great swords, spears and shields, wonderfully inlaid and -decorated, that were handed down from their feudal days. - -While the fleet stayed Japanese spy-boats kept watch in the bay, to see -that their young men did not board the foreign ships in their desire to -see something of the world. Time and again the young Yoshida Shoin and -a friend tried to break through the blockade, but every time they were -sent back to shore. At last the two left Yedo for the port of Shimoda. - -The Americans set up telegraph poles, and laid rails to show the working -of the model locomotive. They gave an exhibition of the steam-engine. -This caused great excitement in the country near Yedo, and every one who -could went to see the strange performance. Already there was a struggle -between those who were eager to learn the inventions of the Americans, -and those who were afraid that the new ideas would spoil old Japan. Many -an ambitious youth stared at the Mikado's presents, and tried to learn -more of their secrets from the sailors on their way to or from the fleet. - -The treaty was signed on March 31, 1854, and agreed that shipwrecked -sailors should be cared for, provisions needed by ships should be -obtained in the ports, and American vessels allowed to anchor in the two -harbors of Shimoda and Hakodate. Actual trade was not yet allowed, nor -were Americans to be permitted to reside in Japan. The hermit nation was -not at all eager to enter into competition with other countries, nor to -allow foreigners to trade with her. Commodore Perry knew, however, that -even the slight terms he had gained would prove the beginning of the -opening up of Japan to the rest of the world. - -April 18, 1854, Perry left the bay of Yedo for Shimoda, and there the -fleet stayed until early in May. While the squadron was there two -Americans, who were botanizing on land, met the youth Yoshida Shoin -and his friend. The young Japanese gave the Americans a letter, but -seeing some native officers approaching, he and his friend stole away. -A few nights later the watch on the war-ship _Mississippi_ heard voices -calling, "Americans, Americans!" They found the two Japanese youths in -a small boat, and took them on board. Paper and writing materials were -found hidden in their clothes, and they explained that they wanted to -go with the fleet to America, and write down what they saw there. The -commodore, however, felt that he was in honor bound to send the two -young men back to their homes; and did so. Yoshida later came to be -one of the leaders of the new Japan that ended the long line of Shogun -rulers, and made the Mikado the actual emperor. - -The fleet cruised from one port to another, now well received by the -people, who had forgotten their fear of the barbarians' fire-vessels. -The governors of the different provinces gave presents to Perry, -among them blocks of native stone to be used in building the great -obelisk that was rising on the banks of the Potomac River in memory of -Washington. On July 17th the last of the squadron left Napa for Hong -Kong. - -The Americans had shown the Japanese that they were a friendly people, -with no desire to harm them. A race that had lived shut off from the -rest of the world for so many centuries was naturally timid and fearful -of strange people. From time to time European ships had landed in Japan, -and almost every time the sailors had done injury to the natives. Perry, -however, convinced them that the United States was a friend, and the -treaty, slight though its terms were, marked the dawn of a new era in -Japan. Like the sleeping princess, she woke at the touch of a stranger -from overseas. - - - - -X - -THE PIG THAT ALMOST CAUSED A WAR - - -Off the far northwestern corner of the United States lie a number of -small islands scattered along the strait that separates the state of -Washington from Vancouver Island. One of these goes by the name of San -Juan Island, a green bit of land some fifteen miles long and seven wide. -The northern end rises into hills, while the southern part is covered -with rich pastures. In the hills are coal and limestone, and along the -shore is splendid cod, halibut, and salmon fishing. In the year 1859 a -farmer named Hubbs pastured his sheep at the southern end of San Juan, -and had for a neighbor to the north a man in the employ of the English -Hudson's Bay Company, whose business it was to raise pigs. The pigs -throve on San Juan, and following their fondness for adventure left -Mr. Griffiths' farm and overran the whole island. Day after day Hubbs -would find the pigs grubbing in his pasture, and finally in a moment -of anger he warned his neighbor that he would kill the next pig that -came on his land. Griffiths heard the warning, but evidently the pigs -did not, for the very next day one of them crossed the boundary line -and ventured into Mr. Hubbs' field. Here it began to enjoy itself in -a small vegetable patch that Mr. Hubbs had planted. As soon as he saw -the trespasser Hubbs went for his gun, and returning with it, shot the -intruding pig. - -When Griffiths found his dead pig he was as angry as Hubbs had been, -and he immediately set out in his sailboat and crossed the strait to -Victoria, a little city on Vancouver Island, where officers of the -British Government had their headquarters. He stated his case, and -obtained a warrant of arrest for his neighbor Hubbs. Then he sailed back -to San Juan with the constable, and going to his neighbor's house read -the warrant to him. Hubbs indignantly replied that he was an American -citizen, and did not have to obey the order of the English officer. -Thereupon the constable left the house, vowing that he would return with -a force of men and compel the farmer to obey him. - -Mr. Hubbs was a shrewd man, and believed that the constable would be -as good as his word. As soon as he had left Hubbs therefore sent a -note to Port Townsend, which was in Washington Territory, asking the -United States officers there to protect him from arrest for killing his -neighbor's pig. When he received the note General William S. Harney, who -was in command, ordered Lieutenant-Colonel Casey to take a company of -soldiers and camp on San Juan Island to protect Mr. Hubbs. - -Now that thoughtless pig had actually lighted a fuse that threatened -to lead to a very serious explosion. As it happened San Juan lay near -the middle of the Strait of Juan de Fuca and commanded both shores. The -people at Victoria could see the American soldiers setting out in their -boats from Port Townsend, and landing on the green island. So long as it -had been the home of a few farmers San Juan had caused little concern, -but now that troops were camping upon it it presented quite a different -look. Victoria was all excitement. The governor, Sir James Douglas, -heard the news first, and then Admiral Prevost, who was in command -of some English war-ships anchored in the little bay near the city. -The admiral was very angry and threatened to blow the Yankees off the -island. He gave orders to move his fleet to one of the harbors of San -Juan, and his cannon were ready to fire shot over the peaceful fields, -where sheep and pigs had divided possession. Sir James Douglas, the -governor, however, was a more peaceful man. He persuaded the admiral not -to be in a hurry, but suggested that it would be wise to have a company -of British regulars camp somewhere on San Juan. This would serve as a -warning to the United States troops. Accordingly Captain Delacombe was -sent over, and pitched his tents on the northern end of the island that -belonged to the Hudson's Bay Company. - -As a result of the pig having trespassed in Mr. Hubbs' vegetable patch, -the flag of the United States flew above the tents on the southern part -of San Juan, and the British flag over the tents on the northern end. -Mr. Hubbs was left in peace, and Mr. Griffiths went on raising pigs; but -the people in Victoria shook their fists across the strait at the people -in Port Townsend, and in each of those cities there was a great deal of -talk about war. The talk was mostly done by men who had nothing to do -with the army. The soldiers on the little island soon became the best of -friends, and spent their time in field sports and giving dinner-parties -to each other. - -No part of the boundary line of the United States has given more trouble -than that in the northwest. The Hudson's Bay Company had once claimed -practically all of what was known as Oregon Territory for England, but -after Marcus Whitman brought his pioneers westward the Hudson's Bay -Company gradually withdrew, and left the southern part of that land to -the United States. For forty years the two countries had disputed about -the line of division, and the political party that was led by Stephen -A. Douglas had taken as its watchword, "Fifty-four, forty,--or fight!" -which meant that unless the United States should get all the land up -to the southern line of Alaska, they would go to war with England. -Fortunately President Polk was not so grasping, and the boundary was -finally settled in 1846 on latitude forty-nine degrees. That was a clear -enough boundary for most of the northwest country, but when one came -close to the Pacific the coast grew ragged, and was dotted with little -islands. Vancouver was by the treaty to belong to England, and the -agreement said that the boundary at this corner should be "the middle -of the channel." Now it happened that San Juan and its small neighbors -lay midway between the two shores, and the treaty failed to say which -channel was meant, the one on the American or the one on the British -side of San Juan. - -As a matter of fact this question of the channel was very important -for the British. It would lead them to the coast of Canada, or the -United States to Alaska. The one to the west, called the Canal de Haro, -was much straighter than the other, and deep enough for the largest -war-ships. Naturally the United States wanted the boundary to run -through this channel, and the British equally naturally wanted the -boundary to run through the opposite channel, called Rosario Strait, -because midway between lay the little island, which would make a -splendid fortress, and might prevent the passage of ships in case of -war between the two nations. So long as the islands were simply pasture -lands the question of ownership was only a matter for debate, but when -the pig was killed, and the troops of both countries camped on San Juan -the question became a much more vital one. - -News of what had happened on San Juan was sent to Washington and to -London; and General Winfield Scott hurried by way of Panama to Mr. -Hubbs' farm. He found that all the United States troops on that part -of the coast that could be spared had been crowded on to the southern -part of the island. This seemed unnecessary, and General Scott agreed -with Sir James Douglas that only one company of United States and one -of British soldiers should stay in camp there. The little island thus -became the scene of what was known as "a joint military occupation." In -the meantime there were many lengthy meetings at Washington and London, -and the two countries decided that they would leave the difficult -question of the boundary line to arbitration. So the statesmen at -Washington drew up papers to prove that the right line lay in the middle -of the Canal de Haro, and statesmen at London drew up other papers to -show that the correct line was through the middle of Rosario Strait, -which would give them San Juan and allow their ships to sail in perfect -safety between the islands and the Vancouver shore. The statesmen and -lawyers took their time about this, while the soldiers amused themselves -fishing for cod and salmon, and the farmers cared for their sheep and -pigs as peacefully as in the days before Hubbs had shot Griffiths' pig. - -After some time the two nations decided to ask the Emperor of Germany to -decide the question of the boundary line. The Emperor appointed three -learned men to determine the question for him. They listened to the -arguments of both sides, and after much study made their report to the -Emperor, who gave his decision on October 23, 1872, and handed a copy -of it to Mr. Bancroft for the United States, and to Lord Odo Russell -for England. His decision was that the claim of the United States was -correct, and that the middle of the Canal de Haro should be the boundary -of that northwestern corner. This gave San Juan to the United States, -much to the disappointment of the people of Vancouver Island, who knew -that a fort on that little strip of land could control all navigation -through the Strait of Juan de Fuca. One month after the decision was -given the British troops cut down their flagstaff on the northern end -and left San Juan. - -San Juan lies opposite the city of Victoria, which has grown to be -one of the largest ports of British Columbia. Instead of lessening in -importance the island has grown in value, because that part of the -country has filled up rapidly, and both sides of the line are more and -more prosperous. The question of who should own San Juan would have been -decided some day, but it was that prowling pig that brought matters to -a head, and for a few weeks at least threatened to draw two countries -into war. On such slight happenings (although in this case it was a very -serious matter for the pig) often hang the fates of nations if we trace -history back to the spark that fired the fuse. - - - - -XI - -JOHN BROWN AT HARPER'S FERRY - - -In the days when Kansas was the battle-ground between those men who -upheld negro slavery, and those who attacked it, a man named John Brown -went from the east to that territory. Several of his sons had already -gone into Kansas, and had sent him glowing accounts of it. Many New -England families were moving west by 1855, and building homes for -themselves on the splendid rolling prairies across the Mississippi. John -Brown, however, went with another purpose. The years had built up in -him such a hatred for negro slavery that it filled his whole thoughts. -Kansas was the field where slave-owners and abolitionists, or those -who opposed slavery, were to fight for the balance of power. Therefore -he went to Kansas and made his home in the lowlands along the eastern -border, near a region that the Indians had named the Swamp of the Swan. - -There were a great many men in Kansas at that time who had no real -convictions in regard to slavery, and to whom the question was one of -politics, and not of religion, as it was to John Brown. Those were days -of warfare on the border, and men from the south and the north were -constantly clashing, fighting for the upper hand in the government, -and taking every possible advantage of each other. Five of John Brown's -sons had already settled in Kansas when he came there with a sick son -and a son-in-law. Early in October, 1855, they reached the home of the -pioneers. They found the houses very primitive, small log shanties, the -walls plastered with mud. The father joined his boys in getting in their -hay, and set traps in the woods to secure game for food. But trouble was -brewing in the town of Lawrence, which was the leading city of Kansas. -Word come to the Swamp of the Swan that men who favored slavery were -marching on the town, intending to drive out the free-state Northerners -there. This was a direct call to John Brown to take the field. His -family set to work preparing corn bread and meat, blankets and cooking -utensils, running bullets, and loading guns. Then five of the men set -out for Lawrence, which was reached at the end of a twenty-four hours' -march. - -The town of Lawrence, a collection of many rude log houses, was filled -with crowds of excited men and women. John Brown, looking like a -patriarch with his long hair and beard, arrived at sundown, accompanied -by his stalwart sons armed with guns and pistols. He was at once put -in charge of a company, and set to work fortifying the town with -earthworks, and preparing for a battle. In a day or two, however, an -agreement was reached between the free-state and the slave-state -parties, and immediate danger of warfare disappeared. Satisfied with -this outcome, Brown and his sons took to the road again, and marched -back to their home. There they stayed during the next winter. In the -cold of the long ice-bound months, the passions of men lay dormant. But -with the coming of spring the old feud smouldered afresh. - -Bands of armed men from the South arrived in Kansas, and one from -Georgia came to camp near the Brown settlement on the Swamp of the Swan. -On a May morning John Brown and four of his sons walked over to the new -camp to learn the Georgians' plans. He had some surveying instruments -with him, and the newcomers took him for a government surveyor and -therefore a slave man, for almost every official that was sent into -Kansas held the Southern views. Pretending to be a surveyor, the father -directed his sons to busy themselves in making a section line through -the camp. The men from Georgia looked on, talking freely. Presently one -of them said: "We've come here to stay. We won't make no war on them -as minds their own business; but all the Abolitionists, such as them -Browns over there, we're going to whip, drive out, or kill,--any way to -get shut of them!" The strangers went on to name other settlers they -meant to drive out, not suspecting who their listeners were, and John -Brown wrote every word down in his surveyor's book. A few days later the -Georgians moved their camp nearer to the Brown settlement, and began -to steal horses and cattle belonging to the free-state men. Brown took -his list, and went to see the men whose names were on it. They held a -meeting, and decided that it was time to teach the "border ruffians," -as such men as the Georgians were called, a lesson. News of the meeting -spread rapidly, and soon it was generally known that the free-state men -about Osawatomie, which was the name of the town near which the Browns -lived, were prepared to take the war-path. - -The old bitter feelings flamed up again in May of 1856. On the -twenty-first of the month, a band of slavery men swept down on the town -of Lawrence, and while the free-state citizens looked on, sacked and -burned the place. John Brown and his sons hurried there, but when they -reached Lawrence the houses were in ashes. He denounced the free-state -men as cowards, for to his ardent nature it seemed an outrage that -men should let themselves be treated so by ruffians. When a discreet -citizen said that they must act with caution John Brown burst out at -him: "Caution, caution, sir! I am eternally tired of hearing that word -caution--it is nothing but the word for cowardice!" There was nothing -for him to do, however, and he was about to turn toward home when a boy -came dashing up. He reported that the ruffians in the Swamp of the Swan -had warned all the women in the Brown settlement that they must leave -Kansas by Saturday or Sunday, or they would be driven out. The women -had been frightened, and taking their children, had fled in an ox-cart -to the house of a relative at a distance. The boy added that two houses -and a store near the settlement had been burned. - -Those were dark days on the border, days that hardened men's natures. -Such a man as John Brown felt that it was his duty to stamp out the -pest of slavery at any cost. He turned to his sons and to some German -friends whose homes had been burned. "I will attend to those fellows," -said he. "Something must be done to show these barbarians that we too -have rights!" A neighbor offered to carry the little band of men in his -wagon. They looked to their guns and cutlasses. Peace-loving people in -Lawrence grew uneasy. Judging from Brown's expression, they feared that -he was going to sow further trouble. - -Eight men drove back to the Browns' settlement, and found that the -messenger's story was correct. They called a meeting of those who were -to be driven out of Kansas, according to the ruffians' threats. At the -meeting they decided to rid the country of the outlaws, who had only -come west to plunder, and some of whom had been employed in chasing -runaway slaves who had escaped from their masters. Their plans made, -Brown's band rode to a little saloon on the Pottawatomie Creek where the -raiders made their headquarters. Within an hour's walk were the men's -cabins. Members of Brown's band stopped at the door of each cabin that -night, and asked for the men they wanted. If the inmates hesitated to -open the door it was broken open. Two of the men on their list could -not be found, but five were led out into the woods and killed. It was a -horrible deed, barbarous even in those days of bloodshed. But Brown's -men felt that they were forced to do it. - -John Brown thought that this one desperate act might set Kansas free; -but it only marked the beginning of a long and bloody drama. As soon -as the facts were known he and his sons became outlaws with prices on -their heads. Even his neighbors at Osawatomie were horrified at his act. -Two of his sons who had not been with him were arrested, and the little -settlement became a center of suspicion. The father withdrew to the -woods, and there about thirty-five men gathered about him. They lived -the life of outlaws, and neither slave-state nor free-state officers -dared to try to capture them. By chance a reporter of the New York -_Tribune_ came on their camp. He wrote: "I shall not soon forget the -scene that here opened to my view. Near the edge of the creek a dozen -horses were tied, all ready saddled for a ride for life, or a hunt -after Southern invaders. A dozen rifles and sabres were stacked against -the trees. In an open space, amid the shady and lofty woods, there was -a great blazing fire with a pot on it; a woman, bareheaded, with an -honest sunburnt face, was picking blackberries from the bushes; three or -four armed men were lying on red and blue blankets on the grass; and two -fine-looking youths were standing, leaning on their arms, on guard near -by.... Old Brown himself stood near the fire, with his shirt sleeves -rolled up, and a large piece of pork in his hand. He was cooking a pig. -He was poorly clad, and his toes protruded from his boots. The old man -received me with great cordiality, and the little band gathered about -me." - -This band, living in forest and swamp, was always ready to strike a -blow for the free-state cause. The slavery men were getting the upper -hand, and Northern families who had settled in Kansas began to look to -John Brown for protection. The "border ruffians" grew worse and worse, -attacking small defenseless settlements, burning homes and carrying -off cattle. Sometimes it was only the fear of retaliation from Brown's -company that kept the raiders from still greater crimes. Occasionally -they met; once they fought a battle at Black Jack, and twenty-four -of the enemy finally surrendered to nine of Brown's men. One of the -leader's sons was badly wounded, and the father had to nurse him in the -woods. - -Affairs grew worse during the summer. The vilest scum of the slave -states poured into Kansas, and the scenes on the border grew more and -more disgraceful. There were pitched battles, and at last the governor -of the territory, thoroughly scared, surrendered his power into the -hands of the slave-holders, and fled for his life. The slave-state men -thought that the time had come to strike a blow that should settle the -question in Kansas permanently. They prepared to gather an army in -Missouri, intending to cross into Kansas, and so terrify settlers from -the North that they would make no further resistance. Conditions looked -desperate to John Brown, and he left the territory for a short time to -see what he could do to get help for his cause. - -A large band of emigrants from the North were on the march toward -Kansas, and Brown rode to meet them. The emigrants had heard of him, and -welcomed him to their midst. He encouraged them and urged them to fight -for freedom, and went on his way hoping to rouse more free-state men to -enter Kansas. - -The East was now thoroughly awake to the lawless situation on the -border, and a new governor, Geary by name, was sent out from Washington. -Meetings were held in the large cities, and money, arms, and men -began to pour into Kansas. Several hundred men from Missouri attacked -Osawatomie, which was defended by Abolitionists, and a battle followed. -John Brown was there, and when his party won the day he gained the -nickname of "Osawatomie Brown," by which he was generally called -thereafter. - -Fired by this success, the leaders of the free-state army planned to -capture Lawrence. The new governor feared that such an act would mean -the beginning of a general civil war, and did his best to prevent it. -He succeeded in this. The free-state men were divided into two parties, -those whose aim was to have Kansas admitted to the Union as a free -state, and those who, like John Brown, were bent on abolishing slavery -throughout the United States. Governor Geary assured the former men -that Kansas would be free soil, and he tried to induce Brown to leave -that part of the country for a time in the interest of peace. Brown was -willing to do as Governor Geary wished, thinking that Kansas was safe -for the present. He wanted to turn his attention to other parts of the -country, where he thought he was more needed. In September, 1856, he -started east with his sons. He was now a well-known figure, hated by -all slave-owners, a hero to Abolitionists, and distrusted by that large -number of men whose object was to secure peace at any cost. - -There were many people in the North at that time who were helping -runaway slaves to escape from their masters, and in certain parts of -the country there were stations of what was called the "Underground -Railroad." Negroes fleeing from the tyranny of Southern owners were -helped along from one station to another, until they were finally safe -across the Canadian border. The law of the country said that negro -slaves were like any other form of property, and that it was the duty of -citizens to return runaways to their masters. There were also scattered -through the border states a number of men whose business it was to catch -fugitive slaves and take them back south. These men were usually of a -brutal type, and the poor refugee who fell into their clutches was made -to suffer for his attempt at escape. Story after story of the sufferings -of slaves came to John Brown's ears, and he felt that it was his duty -to throw himself into the work of the Underground Railroad, and help as -many slaves as possible to cross into Canada. - -This work was not enough for him, however; he wanted to strike some blow -at the slave-owners themselves. The Alleghany Mountain range was one -of the main roads for fugitives, for there men could hide in the thick -forests of the mountainside, and could make some show of defense when -the slave-catchers and bloodhounds came in pursuit. John Brown knew this -country well. He traveled through the North, talking with other men who -felt as he did, and trying to work out a plan which should force the -country to decide this question of negro slavery. At last he decided to -make a raid into Southern territory, and free slaves for himself. - -In the heart of the Alleghanies, and almost midway between Maine and -Florida, is a great natural gateway in the mountains. Here the Potomac -and the Shenandoah Rivers meet, and seem to force their way through the -natural barrier. This pass is Harper's Ferry, and in 1859 it was the -seat of a United States arsenal. To the south was a country filled -with slaves, who looked to Harper's Ferry as the highroad to freedom. -Not far from the arsenal rose the Blue Ridge Mountains, the heights of -which commanded the pass. It was John Brown's plan to lead men from -the Maryland side of the Potomac River to attack the arsenal, and when -it was captured to carry arms and ammunition across the Shenandoah to -Loudoun Heights in the Blue Ridge, and hide there. From here his band -could make raids to the south, freeing slaves, and shielding them from -their masters, while using the mountains for a shelter. - -There were many other men in the United States bent on destroying -slavery, but few so impulsive as John Brown. His plan was rash in the -extreme, and even its success would have profited only a few slaves. But -Brown was a born crusader. The men who followed him were all impulsive, -and many of them were already trained in the rude ways of frontier life. -They knew what he had done in Kansas, and were ready to fight on his -side anywhere else. They had a real reverence for John Brown. The tall -man with the long, almost white hair, keen eyes, and flowing beard was -no ordinary leader. He had the power to convince men that his cause was -just, and to hold them in his service afterward. - -In June, 1859, John Brown, with two of his sons, and two friends, -started south. He rented a farm about five miles from Harper's Ferry, -in a quiet, out-of-the-way place. There were several cabins in the -neighborhood, and as his followers gradually joined him, they occupied -these shelters. A daughter kept house for him during the summer. The men -farmed in the daytime, and planned their conspiracy at night. The leader -did everything he could to win the friendship of his neighbors. He had -some knowledge of medicine, and attended all who were sick. Frequently -he preached in the little Dunker chapel near by. He was always ready -to share his food or give the shelter of his roof to any travelers. -Slowly he collected guns and ammunition, and late in September sent -his daughter north, and arranged to make his attack. At first some of -the other men objected to his plans. One or two did not approve of his -seizing the government arsenal, and thought they should simply make a -raid into Virginia as the slave-state men had formerly carried war into -Kansas. Their leader, however, was determined, and nothing could turn -him. Already he feared lest some suspicion of his purpose might have -spread, and was eager to make his start. He set Sunday night, October -16th, as the time for the raid. That morning he called his men together -and read to them from the Bible. In the afternoon he gave them final -instructions, and added: "And now, gentlemen, let me impress this one -thing upon your minds. You all know how dear life is to you, and how -dear life is to your friends. And in remembering that, consider that -the lives of others are as dear to them as yours are to you. Do not, -therefore, take the life of any one, if you can possibly avoid it; but -if it is necessary to take life in order to save your own, then make -sure work of it." - -At eight o'clock that night the old farm was alive with action. John -Brown called: "Men, get on your arms; we will proceed to the Ferry." -His horse and wagon were driven up before the door, and some pikes, a -sledge-hammer, and a crowbar were put in it. John Brown pulled on his -old Kansas cap, and cried: "Come, boys!" and they went into the lane -that wound down the hill to the highroad. - -Each of the band had been told exactly what he was to do. Two of the -men were to cut the telegraph lines, and two others were to detain the -sentinels at the bridge. Men were detailed to hold each of the bridges -over the two rivers, and others to occupy the engine house in the -arsenal yard. - -The night was cold and dark. John Brown drove his one-horse farm-wagon, -and the men straggled behind him. They had to cover five miles through -woods and over hills before they came down to the narrow road between -the cliffs and the Cincinnati and Ohio canal. Telegraph wires were cut, -the watchman on the bridge was arrested, and the band found their way -open into Harper's Ferry. - -Their object was to seize the arms in the arsenal and rifle factory. -They marched to the armory gate, where they found a watchman. "Open the -gate," one of Brown's men ordered. The watchman said that he could not, -and another of the band declared that there was no time for talk, but -that he would get a crowbar and hammer from the wagon. He twisted the -crowbar in the chain that held the gate, and broke it open; then leaving -the watchman in the care of two men, the rest made a dash for the -arsenal. - -A great deal happened in a short time. Guards were overpowered, the -bridge secured, and the river forded close to the rifle-works. Not a gun -had to be fired, and both soldiers and civilians did as they were bid -by the armed men. Others of the raiders hurried out into the country, -and meeting some colored men, told them their plans, and the latter at -once agreed to join them. Each of the negroes was sent at once to stir -up the slaves in the neighborhood, and bring them to Harper's Ferry. The -raiders then came to the house of Colonel Lewis Washington. They knocked -on the door, and were admitted. Colonel Washington asked what they -wanted. The leader answered, "You are our prisoner, and must come to the -Ferry with us." The Virginian replied, "You can have my slaves, if you -will let me remain." He was told, however, that he must go back with -them; and so he did, together with a large four-horse wagon and some -arms, guns, swords, and cartridges. - -Others of the band had brought in more Virginia prisoners. An east-bound -train on the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad that reached Harper's Ferry -about one o'clock in the morning was detained, and the passengers were -kept there until sunrise. John Brown was in command at the arsenal, -and the rest of his band were acting at different points. By morning -the people of the village were all alarmed. They did not know what the -raiders meant to do, but many of them fled to the mountains, spreading -the news as they went. - -In spite of some little confusion among his followers, practically all -of John Brown's plans had been successful up to this point. He had -captured the armory, and armed about fifty slaves. His next object was -to get the store of guns and ammunition that he had left at his farm. -Here came the first hitch in his plans. He ordered two of his men, Cook -and Tidd, to take some of the freed slaves in Colonel Washington's -wagon, and drive to the house of a man named Terrence Burns, and take -him, his brother and their slaves prisoners. Cook was to stay at Burns's -house while Tidd and the negroes were to go to John Brown's farm, load -the guns in the wagon, and bring them back to a schoolhouse near the -Ferry, stopping on the way for Cook and his prisoners. This the two men -did; but they were so slow in getting the arms from the farm to the -schoolhouse, a distance of not over three miles, that much valuable -time was lost. Cook halted to make a speech on human equality at one -of the houses they passed, and Tidd stopped his wagon frequently and -talked with passers-by on the road. They had the first load of arms at -the schoolhouse by ten o'clock in the morning, but it was four o'clock -in the afternoon before the second load arrived. All the guns and arms -should have been at the schoolhouse by ten o'clock, if the men had -followed John Brown's orders strictly. - -John Brown probably still intended to carry his arms, together with the -prisoners and their slaves, up to Loudoun Heights, where he would be -safe for some time, but his men were so slow in obeying his orders that -the enemy was given time to collect. The train that had left Harper's -Ferry that morning carried word of the raid throughout the countryside, -and men gathered in the neighboring villages ready to march on Harper's -Ferry and put an end to the disturbance. John Brown held thousands of -muskets and rifles in the arsenal, while the men who were marching -to attack him were for the most part armed with squirrel guns and -old-fashioned fowling-pieces. The militia collected rapidly, and marched -toward the Ferry from all directions. By noon the Jefferson Guards had -seized the bridge that crossed the Potomac. Meantime John Brown had -girded to his side a sword that had belonged to Lafayette, that had been -taken from Colonel Lewis Washington's house the night before, called -his men from the arsenal into the street, and said, "The troops are on -the bridge, coming into town; we will give them a warm reception." He -walked back and forth before the small band, encouraging them. "Men, be -cool!" he urged. "Don't waste your powder and shot! Take aim, and make -every shot count! The troops will look for us to retreat on their first -appearance; be careful to shoot first." - -The militia soon advanced across the bridge and up the main street. -When they were some sixty or seventy yards away from the raiders John -Brown gave the order to fire. Some of the militia fell. Other volleys -followed; and the attacking party was thrown into disorder. Finally -they were driven back to the bridge, and took up a position there until -reinforcements arrived. As they retreated John Brown ordered his men -back to the arsenal. In the lull of the firing nearly all the unarmed -people who were still in the town fled to the hills. - -It was now one o'clock in the afternoon, and the band of raiders could -have escaped to Loudoun Heights. But their leader wanted to carry the -guns and ammunition away with him, and to do this he needed the aid -of the rest of his men. He sent a messenger to one of his followers -named Kagi, who was stationed with several others on the bank of the -Shenandoah, with orders for him to hold the place a short time longer. -The messenger, however, was fired on and wounded before he could reach -Kagi, and the latter's party was soon attacked by a force of militia, -and driven into the river. A large flat rock stood up in the river, and -four of the five raiders reached this. There three of them fell before -the fire of bullets, and the fourth was taken a prisoner. In similar -ways the number of John Brown's men was much reduced. - -The leader realized the danger of the situation, and decided that -his best chance of escape lay in using the prisoners he had captured -as hostages for his band's safe retreat. He moved his men, and the -more important of the prisoners, to a small brick building called the -engine-house. There he said to his captives, "Gentlemen, perhaps you -wonder why I have selected you from the others. It is because I believe -you to be the most influential; and I have only to say now that you will -have to share precisely the same fate that your friends extend to my -men." He ordered the doors and windows barricaded, and port-holes cut in -the walls. - -The engine-house now became the raiders' citadel, and the militia and -bands of farmers who were arriving at Harper's Ferry released the -prisoners who were still in the arsenal, and concentrated all their fire -on the band in the small brick house. - -As the sun set the town filled with troops, and it was evident that the -men in the fort would have to surrender. They kept up their firing, -however, from the port-holes, and were answered with a rain of bullets -aimed at the doors and windows. Both sides lost a number of men. Two of -John Brown's sons had been shot during the day. Finally the leader asked -if one of his prisoners would volunteer to go out among the citizens and -induce them to cease firing on the fort, as they were endangering the -lives of their friends, the other captives. He promised that if they -would stop firing his men would do the same. One of the prisoners agreed -to try this, and the firing ceased for a time. - -More troops poured into Harper's Ferry, and presently Colonel Robert E. -Lee arrived with a force of United States marines. Guards were set about -the engine-house to see that John Brown and his men did not escape. Then -Colonel Lee sent a flag of truce to the engine-house, and in the name of -the United States demanded that Brown surrender, advising him to throw -himself on the clemency of the government. John Brown answered that he -knew what that meant, and added, "I prefer to die just here." Again in -the morning Lee sent his aide to the fort. The officer asked, "Are you -ready to surrender, and trust to the mercy of the government?" Brown -answered, "No, I prefer to die here." Then the soldiers attacked, not -with guns this time, but with sledge-hammers, intending to break down -the doors. This did not succeed, and seizing a long ladder they used -it as a battering-ram, and finally broke the fastenings of the main -door. Lieutenant Green pushed his way in, and, jumping on top of the -engine, looked about for John Brown. Amid a storm of bullets, he saw -the white-haired leader, and sprang at him, at the same time striking -at him with his sword. John Brown fell forward, with his head between -his knees. In a few minutes all of the raiders who were left in the -engine-house had surrendered to the government troops. - -Of the band that had left the farm on Sunday night seven were taken -prisoners, ten had been killed in the fighting, and six others had -managed to make their escape. By noon of Tuesday, October 18th, the raid -was over. John Brown, wounded in half a dozen places, lay on the floor -of the engine-house; and the governor of Virginia bent over him. "Who -are you?" asked the governor. The old man answered, "My name is John -Brown; I have been well known as old John Brown of Kansas. Two of my -sons were killed here to-day, and I'm dying too. I came here to liberate -slaves, and was to receive no reward. I have acted from a sense of duty, -and am content to await my fate; but I think the crowd have treated me -badly. I am an old man. Yesterday I could have killed whom I chose; but -I had no desire to kill any person, and would not have killed a man had -they not tried to kill me and my men. I could have sacked and burned the -town, but did not; I have treated the persons whom I took as hostages -kindly, and I appeal to them for the truth of what I say. If I had -succeeded in running off slaves this time, I could have raised twenty -times as many men as I have now for a similar expedition. But I have -failed." - -The news of John Brown's raid spread through the country, and the people -North and South were amazed and bewildered. They had grown used to -hearing of warfare in the distant borderland of Kansas, but this was -a battle that had taken place in the very heart of the Union. Men did -not know what to think of it. John Brown appeared to many of them as a -monstrous figure, a firebrand who would touch his torch to the tinder -of slavery, and set the whole nation in a blaze. Newspapers and public -speakers denounced him. They said he was attacking the foundations of -the country when he seized the arsenal and freed slaves from their -lawful owners. Only a handful of men had any good to say for him, and -that handful were looked upon as madmen by their neighbors. Only a few -could read the handwriting on the wall, and realize that John Brown was -merely a year or two in advance of the times. - -We who know the story of the Civil War and the abolition of slavery -think of John Brown as a hero. We forget the outlaw and remember the -martyr. If he was setting the laws of men at defiance he was also -following the law that he felt was given him by God. His faith and his -simplicity have made him a great figure in history. A man who met him -riding across the plains of Kansas in the days of the border warfare -drew a vivid picture of him. He said that a tall man on horseback -stopped and asked him a question. "It was on a late July day, and in its -hottest hours. I had been idly watching a wagon and one horse toiling -slowly northward across the prairie, along the emigrant trail that had -been marked out by free-state men.... John Brown, whose name the young -and ardent had begun to conjure with and swear by, had been described to -me. So, as I heard the question, I looked up and met the full, strong -gaze of a pair of luminous, questioning eyes. Somehow I instinctively -knew this was John Brown, and with that name I replied.... It was a -long, rugged-featured face I saw. A tall, sinewy figure, too (he had -dismounted), five feet eleven, I estimated, with square shoulders, -narrow flank, sinewy and deep-chested. A frame full of nervous power, -but not impressing one especially with muscular vigor. The impression -left by the pose and the figure was that of reserve, endurance, and -quiet strength. The questioning voice-tones were mellow, magnetic, and -grave. On the weatherworn face was a stubby, short, gray beard.... This -figure,--unarmed, poorly clad, with coarse linen trousers tucked into -high, heavy cowhide boots, with heavy spurs on their heels, a cotton -shirt opened at the throat, a long torn linen duster, and a bewrayed -chip straw hat ... made up the outward garb and appearance of John Brown -when I first met him. In ten minutes his mounted figure disappeared over -the north horizon." - -But John Brown had seized the government's arsenal, and put arms in the -hands of negro slaves, and therefore the law must take its course with -him. Its officers came to him where he lay on the floor of his fort, a -badly-wounded man, who had fought for fifty-five long hours, who had -seen two sons and eight of his comrades shot in the battle, and who felt -that his cause was lost. - -When men who owned slaves asked the reason for his raid, he answered, -"You are guilty of a great wrong against God and humanity and it would -be perfectly right for any one to interfere with you so far as to free -those you wilfully and wickedly hold in bondage.... I pity the poor -in bondage that have none to help them. That is why I am here; not to -gratify any personal animosity, revenge, or vindictive spirit." - -A number of Virginians had been killed in the fight, and it was -difficult to secure a fair trial for the raiders. The state did its best -to hold the scales of justice even. The formal trial began on October -27, 1859. Friends from the North came to his aid, and a Massachusetts -lawyer acted as his counsel. John Brown heard the charges against him -lying on a straw pallet, and four days later he heard the jury declare -him guilty of treason. December 2, 1859, the sentence of the court was -carried out, and John Brown was hanged as a traitor. His last written -words were, "I, John Brown, am quite certain that the crimes of this -guilty land will never be purged away but with blood. I had, as I now -think vainly, flattered myself that without very much bloodshed it might -be done." - -Every great cause in history has its martyrs, and John Brown was one of -those who were sacrificed in the battle for human freedom. Statesmen -had tried for years to argue away the wrongs that began when the first -African bondsmen were brought to the American colonies. Statesmen, -however, cannot change the views of men and women as to what is right -and wrong, and all the arguments in the world could not convince such -men as John Brown and his friends that one man had a right to the -possession of a fellow-creature. He struck his blow wildly, but its echo -rang in the ears of the North, and never ceased until the Civil War was -ended, and slavery wiped off the continent. The great negro orator, -Frederick Douglass, said twenty-two years later at Harper's Ferry, "If -John Brown did not end the war that ended slavery, he did, at least, -begin the war that ended slavery. If we look over the dates, places, and -men for which this honor is claimed, we shall find that not Carolina, -but Virginia, not Fort Sumter, but Harper's Ferry and the arsenal, -not Major Anderson, but John Brown began the war that ended American -slavery, and made this a free republic.... When John Brown stretched -forth his arm the sky was cleared,--the armed hosts of freedom stood -face to face over the chasm of a broken Union, and the clash of arms was -at hand." - -In the spring of 1861 the Boston Light Infantry went to Fort Warren in -Boston Harbor to drill. They formed a quartette to sing patriotic songs, -and some one wrote the verses that are known as "John Brown's Body," -and set them to the music of an old camp-meeting tune. Regiment after -regiment heard the song and carried it with them into camp and battle. -So the spirit of the simple crusader went marching on through the war, -and his name was linked forever with the cause of freedom. - - - - -XII - -AN ARCTIC EXPLORER - - -When Columbus sailed from Palos in 1492 he hoped to find a shorter -route to Cathay or China than any that was then known, and the great -explorers who followed after him had the same hope of such a discovery -in their minds. When men learned that instead of finding a short route -to China they had come upon two great continents that shared the Western -Ocean, they turned their thoughts to discovering what was known as -the Northwest Passage. They hoped to find a way by which ships might -sail from the Atlantic to the Pacific Ocean north of America. The -great English explorers in particular were eager to find such an ocean -route, and this search was the real beginning of the fur-trading around -Hudson's Bay, the cod-fishing of Newfoundland, and the whale-fishing of -Baffin Bay. - -One sea-captain after another sailed across the Atlantic, and strove to -find the passage through the Arctic regions; but the world of snow and -ice defeated each of them. Some went back to report that there was no -Northwest Passage, and others were lost among the ice-floes and never -returned. Then in 1845 England decided to send a great expedition to -make another attempt, and put at the head of it Sir John Franklin, a -brave captain who had fought with Nelson and knew the sea in all its -variety. He sailed from England May 26, 1845, taking one hundred and -twenty-nine men in the two ships _Erebus_ and _Terror_. He carried -enough provisions to last him for three years. On July 26, 1845, -Franklin's two vessels were seen by the captain of a whaler, moored to -an iceberg in Baffin Bay. They were waiting for an opening in the middle -of an ice-pack, through which they might sail across the bay and enter -Lancaster Sound. They were never seen again, and the question of what -had happened to Sir John Franklin's party became one of the mysteries of -the age. - -More than twenty ships, with crews of nearly two thousand officers and -men, at a cost of many millions of dollars, sought for Sir John Franklin -in the years between 1847 and 1853. One heroic explorer after another -sailed into the Arctic, crossed the ice-floes, and searched for some -trace of the missing men. But none could be found, and one after another -the explorers came back, their only report being that the ice had -swallowed all traces of the English captain and his vessels. At length -the last of the expeditions sent out by the English Government returned, -and the world decided that the mystery would never be solved. But brave -Lady Franklin, the wife of Sir John, urged still other men to seek for -news, and at last explorers found that all of Franklin's expedition had -perished in their search for the Northwest Passage. - -Arctic explorers usually leave records telling the story of their -discoveries at different points along the road they follow. For a long -time after the fate of Franklin's party was known, men tried to find -records he might have left in cairns, or piles of stones through the -Arctic regions. Whale vessels sometimes brought news of such records, -but most of them proved to be idle yarns told by the whalers to surprise -their friends at home. One of these stories was that all the missing -records of Sir John Franklin were to be found in a cairn which was built -near Repulse Bay. This story was told so often that people came to -believe it was true, and some young Americans set out to make a search -of King William Land and try to find the cairn. The party sailed on the -whaler _Eothen_, and five men landed at Repulse Bay. The leader was -Lieutenant Frederick Schwatka, of the United States Army. He had three -friends with him named Gilder, Klutschak, and Melms, and with them was -an Eskimo, who was known as Joe. - -The young Americans set up a winter camp on Chesterfield Inlet, and -tried to live as much like the native Eskimos as possible. During the -winter they met many natives on their hunting-trips, and the latter soon -convinced them that they were on a wild-goose chase, and that the story -of the cairn was probably only a sailor's yarn. Lieutenant Schwatka, -however, was not the sort of man to return home without some results -from his trip, and so he made up his mind to go into the country where -Franklin's party had perished, hoping that he might find some record -which would throw light on the earlier explorer's travels. - -The Eskimos were a race largely unknown to civilized men. White men -had seen much more of the native American Indians who lived in more -temperate climates. These young Americans found a great deal to interest -them during the winter among these strange people of the far North. -Hunting was their chief pursuit, and the Americans found that they spent -much of their time indoors playing a game called _Nu-glew-tar_, which -sharpened their quickness of eye and sureness of aim. It was a simple -sport; a small piece of bone, pierced with a row of small holes, was -hung from the roof of the hut by a rope of walrus hide, and a heavy -weight was fastened to the end of the bone to keep it from swinging. The -Eskimo players were each armed with a small sharp-pointed stick, and -each in turn would thrust his stick at the bone, trying to pierce one of -the holes. The prize was won by the player who pierced the bone and held -it fast with his stick. - -As soon as spring opened Lieutenant Schwatka started out, leaving his -winter camp in April, 1879, and crossing in as straight a line as -possible to Montreal Island, near the mouth of the Black River. He took -with him twelve Eskimos, men, women, and children, and dogs to pull the -sledges. They carried food for one month only, intending to hunt during -the summer. Every night the Eskimos built snow huts, or igloos, in which -the party camped. As they went on they met men of another Arctic tribe, -the Ook-joo-liks, who wore shoes and gloves made of musk-ox skin, which -was covered with hair several inches long, and made the wearers look -more like bears than like men. One of these natives said that he had -seen a ship that had sunk off Adelaide Peninsula, and that he and his -friends had obtained such articles as spoons, knives, and plates from -the ship. Lieutenant Schwatka thought the ship was probably either the -_Erebus_ or the _Terror_. Later his party found an old woman who said -that when she had been on the southeast coast of King William Land not -many years before she had seen ten white men dragging a sledge with a -boat on it. Five of the white men put up a tent on the shore and five -stayed with the boat. Some men of the woman's tribe had killed seals and -given them to the white men; then the white men had left, and neither -she nor any of her tribe had seen them again. Asking questions of the -Eskimos he met, Lieutenant Schwatka and his comrades gradually pieced -together the story of what had happened to Franklin and his men. But the -American was not content with what he had learned in this way, and he -determined to cross Simpson Strait to King William Land, and search for -records there during the summer. This meant that he would have to spend -the summer on this bare and desolate island, as there would be no chance -to cross the strait until the cold weather of autumn should form new ice -for a bridge. - -The Eskimos did everything they could to persuade him not to cross -to the island. They told him that in 1848 more than one hundred men -had perished of starvation there, and added that no one could find -sufficient food to keep them through the summer. Yet the fearless -soldier and his friends insisted on making the attempt, and some of the -Eskimos were daring enough to go with them. - -It seemed doubtful whether they could even get across the strait. Every -few steps some man would sink into the ice-pack up to his waist and his -legs would dangle in slush without finding bottom. The sledges would -sink so that the dogs, floundering and scrambling, could not pull them. -The men had to push the dog-teams along, and after the first day's -travel they were all so exhausted that they had to rest the whole of -the next day before they could start on again. Finally they reached the -opposite shore of the strait, and, while the natives built igloos and -hunted, the Americans searched for records of Franklin's party. They -found enough traces to prove that the men who had sought the Northwest -Passage had spent some time on this desolate strip of land. - -More than once they were in danger of starvation. In the spring the -Eskimos hunted wild ducks, which they found in remote stretches of -water. Their way of hunting was to steal up on a flock of the birds, -and, as soon as the ducks took alarm, to rush toward the largest bunch -of them. The hunter then threw his spear, made with three barbs of -different lengths, and caught the duck on the sharp central prong. The -long wooden shaft of the spear would keep the duck floating on the water -until the hunter could seize it. But as summer drew on, and the ducks -migrated, food grew very scarce. Once or twice they discovered bears, -which they shot, and when there was nothing else to eat they lived on a -small black berry that the Eskimos called _parawong_, which proved very -sustaining. - -As the white men tramped day after day over the icy hillocks their -footwear wore out, and often walking became a torment. In telling of -their march Gilder said, "We were either wading through the hillside -torrents or lakes, which, frozen on the bottom, made the footing -exceedingly treacherous, or else with sealskin boots, soft by constant -wetting, painfully plodding over sharp stones set firmly in the ground -with the edges pointed up. Sometimes as a new method of injury, stepping -and slipping on flat stones, the unwary foot slid into a crevice that -seemingly wrenched it from the body." - -When they had nothing else to eat the white men lived on the same -food as the native hunters. This was generally a tallow made from the -reindeer, and eaten with strips of reindeer meat. A dish of this, mixed -with seal-oil, was said to look like ice-cream and took the place of -that dessert with the Eskimos. Lieutenant Schwatka said, however, that -instead of tasting like ice-cream it reminded him more of locust, -sawdust and wild-honey. - -As autumn drew on they made ready to cross back to the mainland; but it -took some time for the ice to form on the strait. Gilder said of their -camp life: "We eat quantities of reindeer tallow with our meat, probably -about half of our daily food. Breakfast is eaten raw and frozen, but we -generally have a warm meal in the evening. Fuel is hard to obtain and -now consists of a vine-like moss called _ik-shoot-ik_. Reindeer tallow -is used for a light. A small, flat stone serves for a candlestick, on -which a lump of tallow is placed close to a piece of fibrous moss called -_mun-ne_, which is used for a wick. The melting tallow runs down upon -the stone and is immediately absorbed by the moss. This makes a cheerful -and pleasant light, but is most exasperating to a hungry man as it -smells exactly like frying meat. Eating such quantities of tallow is a -great benefit in this climate, and we can easily see the effects of it -in the comfort with which we meet the cold." - -As soon as the ice on the strait was frozen hard enough the reindeer -crossed it, and by the middle of October King William Land was -practically deserted. Then the Americans and Eskimos started back to the -mainland. Winter had now come, and the weather was intensely cold, often -ninety degrees below freezing. In December the traveling grew worse, and -food became so scarce that they had to stop day after day for hunting. -In January a blizzard struck their camp and lasted thirteen days; then -wolves prowled about them at night, and once actually killed four of -their dogs. "A sealskin full of blubber," said Gilder, "would have saved -many of our dogs; but we had none to spare for them, as we were reduced -to the point when we had to save it exclusively for lighting the igloos -at night. We could not use it to warm our igloos or to cook with. Our -meat had to be eaten cold--that is, frozen so solid that it had to be -sawed and then broken into convenient-sized lumps, which when first put -into the mouth were like stones. Sometimes, however, the snow was beaten -off the moss on the hillsides and enough was gathered to cook a meal." - -When they were almost on the point of starvation a walrus was killed, -and supplied them with food to last until they got back to the nearest -Eskimo village. From the coast they took ship to the United States. The -records they brought with them practically completed the account of what -had happened to Sir John Franklin's ill-fated expedition. And almost -equally important were the new details they brought in regard to Eskimo -life, and the proof they gave that men of the temperate zone could pass -a year in the frozen land of the far north if they would live as the -natives did, and adapt themselves to the rigors of that climate. - - - - -XIII - -THE STORY OF ALASKA - - -In the far northwestern corner of North America is a land that has had -few stirring scenes in its history. It is an enormous tract, close to -the Arctic Sea, and far from the busy cities of the United States. -Not until long after the English, French, and Spanish discoverers had -explored the country in the Temperate Zone did any European find Alaska. -Even when it was found it seemed to offer little but ice-fields and -desolate prairies, leading to wild mountain ranges that did not tempt -men to settle. Seal hunters came and went, but generally left the native -Indians in peace. Most of these hunters came from Siberia, for the -Russians were the first owners of this land. - -An officer in the Russian Navy named Vitus Bering found the strait -that is called by his name in 1728. Some years later he was sent into -the Arctic Sea again by the Empress Anne of Russia to try to find the -wonderful country that Vasco de Gama had sought. He sailed in summer, -and after weathering heavy storms finally reached Kayak Island on St. -Elias Day, July 17, 1741, and named the great mountain peak in honor -of that saint. More storms followed, and soon afterward the brave -sailor was shipwrecked and drowned off the Comandorski Islands. His crew -managed to get back to Siberia, having lived on the meat of the seals -they were able to shoot. Russian traders saw the sealskins they brought -home, and sent out expeditions to obtain more furs. Some returned richly -laden, but others were lost in storms and never heard from. There was -so much danger in the hunting that it was not until 1783 that Russian -merchants actually established trading-posts in Alaska. Then a rich -merchant of Siberia named Gregory Shelikoff built a post on Kadiak -Island, and took into partnership with him a Russian named Alexander -Baranof. Baranof built a fort on an island named for him, some three -miles north of the present city of Sitka. The two men formed the Russian -American Fur Company, and Baranof became its manager in America. - -One day a seal hunter came to Baranof at his fortress, and took from -his pocket a handful of nuggets and scales of gold. He held them out -to the Russian, and said that he knew where many more like them were -to be found. "Ivan," said Baranof, "I forbid you to seek for any more. -You must not say a word about this, or there will be trouble. If the -Americans or the English know that there is gold in these mountains we -will be ruined. They will rush in here by the thousands, and crowd us to -the wall." Baranof was a fur merchant, and did not want to see miners -flocking to his land, as his company was growing rich from the seals -and fur-trading with the natives. - -Little by little, however, the news leaked out that the northwestern -country had rich minerals, and soon the King of Spain began to covet -some of that wealth for himself. The Spaniards claimed that they owned -all of the country that had not yet been mapped out, and they sent -an exploring party, under Perez, to make charts of the northwest. -Perez sailed along the coast, and finding two capes, named them Santa -Margarita and Santa Magdalena, but beyond that he did little to help the -cause of Spain. Some years later exploring parties were sent out from -Mexico, but they found that the wild ice-covered country was already -claimed by the Russians, and that the Czar had no intention of giving it -up. Other nations, therefore, soon ceased to claim it, and the Russian -hunters and traders were allowed to enjoy the country in peace. - -Alexander Baranof made a great success of the trade in skins, but the -men who took his place were not equal to him. The company began to lose -money, and the Czar of Russia decided that the country was too far away -from his capital to be properly looked after. The United States finally -made an offer to buy the great territory from the Czar, although the -government at Washington was not very anxious to make the purchase. -The tract, large as it was, did not seem to promise much, and it was -almost as far from Washington as it was from St. Petersburg. The Czar -was quite willing to sell, however, and so the United States bought the -country from him in 1867, paying him $7,200,000 for it. - -On a fine October afternoon in 1867 Sitka Bay saw the Stars and Stripes -flying from three United States war-ships, while the Russian Eagle waved -from the flagstaffs and houses in the small town. On the shore soldiers -of the two nations were drawn up in front of the old castle, and -officers stood waiting at the foot of the flagpole on the parade ground. -Then a gun was fired from one of the United States war-ships, and -instantly the Russian batteries returned the salute. A Russian officer -lowered his country's flag from the parade ground pole, and an American -pulled the Stars and Stripes to the peak. Guns boomed and regimental -bands played, and then the Russian troops saluted and left the fortress, -and the territory became part of the United States. - -Up to that time the country had been known as Russian America, but now -a new name had to be found. Some suggested American Siberia, and others -the Zero Islands; but an American statesman, Charles Sumner, urged the -name of Alaska, a native word meaning "the Great Land," and this was the -name that was finally adopted. - -It took many years to explore the western part of the United States, and -men who were in search of wealth in mines and forests did not have to -go as far as Alaska to find it. That bleak country was separated from -the United States by a long, stormy sea voyage on the Pacific, or a -tedious and difficult overland journey through Canada. Alaska might have -remained for years as little known as while Russia owned it had it not -been for a small party of men who set out to explore the Yukon and the -Klondike Rivers. - -On June 16, 1897, a small ship called the _Excelsior_ sailed into San -Francisco Harbor, and half an hour after she had landed at her wharf the -news was spreading far and wide that gold had been discovered in large -quantities on the Klondike. Some of the men had gone out years before; -some only a few months earlier, but they all brought back fortunes. -Not one had left with less than $5,000 in gold, gathered in nuggets or -flakes, in tin cans, canvas bags, wooden boxes, or wrapped up in paper. -The cry of such sudden wealth was heard by many adventurers, and the old -days of 'Forty-Nine in California began over again when the wild rush -started north to the Klondike. - -On June 17th another ship, the _Portland_, arrived at Seattle, with -sixty more miners and $800,000 in gold. This was the largest find of the -precious mineral that had been made anywhere in the world, and Seattle -followed the example of San Francisco in going gold-crazy. Immediately -hundreds of people took passage on the outward bound steamers, and -hundreds more were turned away because of lack of room. Ships set out -from all the seaports along the Pacific coast of the United States, and -from the Canadian ports of Victoria and Vancouver. As in the old days -of 1849 men gave up their business to seek the gold fields, but now they -had to travel to a wilder and more desolate country than California had -been. - -There were many ways of getting to the Klondike country. Those who -went by ocean steamer had to transfer to flat-bottomed boats to go up -the Yukon River. This was the easiest route, but the boats could only -be used on the Yukon from June until September, and the great rush of -gold-seekers came later that autumn. A second route was by the Chilkoot -trail, which had been used for many years by miners going into the -country of the Yukon. Over this trail horses could be used as far as -the foot of the great Chilkoot Pass, but from there luggage had to be -carried by hand. Another trail, much like this one, was the White Pass -trail, but it led through a less-known country than the Chilkoot, and -was not so popular. The Canadian government laid out a trail of its -own, which was called "the Stikeen route," and which ran altogether -through Canadian territory. Besides these there were innumerable other -roads through the mountains, and along the rivers; but the farther men -got from the better known trails the more danger they were in of losing -their way, or suffering from hunger and hardships. - -Towns blossomed along the coast of Alaska almost over night, but they -were strange looking villages. The ships that landed at Skagway in the -summer of 1897 found a number of rough frame houses, with three or four -larger than the rest which hung out hotel signs. The only government -officer lived in a tent over which flew the flag of the United States. -The passengers landed their outfits themselves, for labor was scarce, -and found shelter wherever they could until they might start on the -trail. - -No one seemed to know much about the country they were going through, -but fortunately most of the men were experienced woodsmen. They loaded -their baggage on their packhorses, and started out, ready for any sort -of country they might have to cross. Sometimes the trail lay over -miry ground, where a false step to the right or left would send the -horses or men deep into the bog; sometimes it led up steep and rocky -mountainsides, where a man had to guard his horse's footing as carefully -as his own; and much of the way was in the bed of an old river, where -each step brought a splash of mud, and left the travelers at the end -of the day spattered from head to foot. The journey was harder on the -horses than on the men. The heavy packs they carried, and the wretched -footing, caused them to drop along the road from time to time, and then -the travelers had to make the best shift they could with their luggage. -Had the men journeyed alone, or in small companies, they would have -suffered greatly, but the Chilkoot trail was filled with miners who -were ready to help each other, and to give encouragement to any who -lagged behind. At Dyea they came to an old Alaskan settlement, an Indian -trading post, where a number of native tribes lived in their little -wooden cabins. These men were the Chilkats, the Stikeen Indians, and the -Chilkoots, short, heavy men, with heads and eyes more like Mongolians -than like American Indians. Both men and women were accustomed to -painting their faces jet black or chocolate brown, in order to protect -their eyes and skin from the glare of the sunlight on the snow. The -traveler could here get Indians to act as guides, or if he had lost his -horses might obtain dogs and sleds to carry some of his packs. - -Each of the little settlements through which the travelers went boasted -of a hotel, usually a frame building with two or three large rooms. Each -day meals were served to three or four hundred hungry travelers at rude -board tables, and at night the men would spread their blankets on the -floor and lie down to sleep. But as the trail went farther inland these -little settlements grew fewer, and the men had to find whatever shelter -they could. From Dyea they pushed on through the Chilkoot Pass, where -the cliffs rose high above them. The winds blew cold from the north, and -the mists kept everything wet. In the Pass some men turned back, finding -the trip too difficult. Those who went on met with increasing hardships. -They came to a place called Sheep Camp, where a stream of water and -rocks from the mountain top had swept down upon a town of tents and -carried them all away. Stories of similar happenings at other places -were passed from mouth to mouth along the trail. More men turned back, -finding such accidents a good excuse, and only the most determined stuck -to the road. - -In time they came to a chain of lakes and rivers. The travelers stopped -to build rude boats and paddles, and navigated them as best they could. -The rivers were full of rapids, and it was only by a miracle that the -little clumsily-built skiffs went dancing over the waters safely, and -escaped the jutting rocks on either bank. In the rivers there was good -trout fishing, and in the wild country good hunting, and Indian boys -brought game to the tents at night. To the trees at each stopping-place -papers were fastened, telling of the marvelous adventures of the miners -who had just gone over the trail. As they neared Dawson City they found -the Yukon River more and more covered with floating ice, and travel by -boat became harder. After a time the oars, paddles, gunwales, and all -the baggage in the boats was encrusted with ice, and the boatmen had to -make their way slowly among the floes. Then they came to a turn in the -river, and on the bank saw a great number of tents and people. "How far -is it to Dawson?" the boatman would call. "This is Dawson. If you don't -look out you'll be carried past," the men on shore answered. Paddles -were thrust into the ice, and the boat brought to shore. The trip from -Seattle had so far taken ninety-two days. - -Food was scarce in Dawson, and men were urged to leave as soon as they -could. Winter was now setting in, and the miners traveled with dog teams -and sleds to the place where they meant to camp. Little work could be -done in the winter, and the time was spent in preparing to work the -gold fields in the early spring. All through the cold weather the men -talked of the fortunes waiting for them, and when the warm weather came -they staked out their claims and set to work. Stories of fabulous finds -spread like wild-fire, and those who were not finding gold rushed to the -places that were proving rich. That summer many new towns sprang up, and -in a few weeks the Bonanza and Eldorado mines made their owners rich, -and all the tributaries of the Klondike River were yielding a golden -harvest. - -When men found land that they thought would prove rich they made haste -to claim it. Sometimes wild races followed, rivals trying to beat each -other to the government offices at Dawson in order to claim the land. -Frequently after such a wild race the claim would amount to nothing, -while another man, who had picked out some place that no one wanted, -would find a rich lode and make a fortune from it. Then there would be -great excitement, for sudden wealth usually went to the miner's head. -He would go down to Dawson, and spend his money freely, while every -one in the town would crowd around him to share in his good luck. One -of the most successful was a Scotchman, Alexander McDonald. At the -time of the Klondike strike he was employed by a company at the town of -Forty-Mile. He had a little money and began to buy separate pieces of -land. He could not afford the rich ground, but managed to purchase more -than forty claims through the Klondike. At the end of that first season -his fortune was said to be $5,000,000, and might well have been more, as -all his claims had not been fully worked. He was called "the King of the -Klondike," and pointed out to newcomers as an example of what men might -do in the gold fields. - -That was only the beginning of the story of the Alaskan gold fields, -and each year brought news of other discoveries. But the one season of -1897 was enough to prove the great value of Alaska, and to show that the -United States had done well to buy that great territory from the Czar -of Russia. Yet gold is only a small part of its riches, and even should -the fields of the Klondike yield no more of the precious mineral, the -seals, the fur trade, and the cities springing up along its coast are -worth much more than the $7,000,000 paid for it. It is still a land of -adventure, one of the few waste places that beckon men to come and find -what wealth lies hidden within its borders. - - - - -XIV - -HOW THE "MERRIMAC" WAS SUNK IN SANTIAGO HARBOR - - -In the small hours of the morning of June 3, 1898, the _Merrimac_, a -vessel that had once been a collier in the United States Navy, slipped -away from the war-ships of the American fleet that lay off the coast -of Cuba, and headed toward the harbor of Santiago. The moon was almost -full, and there was scarcely a cloud in the sky. To the northwest lay -the _Brooklyn_, her great mass almost white in the reflected light. On -the northeast the _Texas_ loomed dark and warlike, and farther away lay -a ring of other ships, dim and ghostly in the distance. Ahead was the -coast of Cuba, with an outline of mountains rising in a half-circle -beyond the harbor. Five miles across the water Morro Castle guarded the -entrance to the harbor, in which lay a fleet of the Spanish Admiral -Cervera. - -To steer directly for Morro Castle would be to keep the _Merrimac_ full -in the moon's path, and to avoid this she stood to the eastward of the -course, and stole along at a slow rate of speed. The small crew on -board, a commander and seven men, were stripped to their underclothes -and wore life-preservers and revolver-belts. Each man had taken his -life in his hand when he volunteered for this night's work. They wanted -to sink the _Merrimac_ at a narrow point in the harbor, and bottle up -the Spanish fleet beyond it. - -As they neared the great looming fortress of the Morro it was impossible -to keep the ship hidden; the sentries on the castle must see the dark -object now, and wonder what she intended. The _Merrimac_ gave up its -oblique course, and steered straight ahead. The order "Full speed!" went -from Lieutenant Hobson, a naval constructor in command, to the engineer. -Foam dashed over the bows, and the long shape shot for the harbor -entrance, regardless of what the enemy might think or do. Soon the Morro -stood up high above them, the moon clearly revealing the great central -battery that crowned the fortress top. - -The Spanish guns were only five hundred yards away, and yet the enemy -had given no sign of having seen the _Merrimac_. Then suddenly a light -flashed from near the water's edge on the left side of the entrance, -and a roar followed. The _Merrimac_ did not quiver. The shot must have -fallen astern. Again there was a flash, and this time the crew could -hear the splash of water as the projectile struck back of them. Through -their night-glasses they saw a picket boat with rapid-fire guns lying -close in the shadows of the shore. Her guns had probably been aimed at -the _Merrimac's_ rudder; but so far they had missed their aim. With a -rapid-fire gun to reply the _Merrimac_ might have demolished the other -boat in half a minute, but she had no such equipment. She would have -to pass within a ship's length of this picket. There was nothing to do -but pay no heed to her aim at the _Merrimac's_ rudder, and steer for -the high wall off Morro Castle, where the deep-water channel ran close -inshore. "A touch of port helm!" was the order. "A touch of port helm, -sir," came the answer; and the vessel stood toward the wall. - -There came a crash from the port side. "The western battery has opened -on us, sir!" reported the man on the bridge to Hobson. "Very well; pay -no attention to it," was the answer. The commander knew he must take the -_Merrimac_ at least another ship's length forward, and wondered if the -enemy would give him that much grace. A shot crossed the bridge, and -struck. No one was hurt. They had almost reached the point where they -were to stop. Another moment or two, and over the engine telegraph went -the order, "Stop!" The engineer obeyed. The _Merrimac_ slowed off Morro -rock. - -A high rocket shot across the channel entrance. From each side came the -firing of batteries. Hobson and his men were too busy to heed them. The -_Merrimac_, still swinging under her own headway, brought her bow within -thirty feet of the rock before she righted. Another ship's length, and -she would be at the point where her commander had planned to take her; -then the stearing-gear stopped working, and she was left at the mercy of -the current. - -The ship must be sunk before the current could carry her out of the -course. This was done by exploding torpedoes on the outside of the -vessel. Hobson gave the order, and the first torpedo went off, blowing -out the collision bulkhead. There was no reply from the second or third -torpedoes. Hobson crossed the bridge, and shouted, "Fire all torpedoes!" -In the roar of the Spanish batteries his voice could hardly be heard. - -Meantime the guns on the shores back of the harbor were pouring their -shot at the black target in the moonlight, and the din was terrific. -Word came to Hobson that some of the torpedoes could not be fired, as -their cells had been broken. The order was given to fire the others, and -the fifth exploded promptly, but the remaining ones had been shattered -by Spanish fire and were useless. The commander knew that under these -circumstances it would take some time for the _Merrimac_ to sink. - -The important point was to keep the ship in the center of the harbor; -but the stern-anchor had already been cut away. Hobson watched the bow -move against the shore-line. There was nothing to do but wait and see -where the tide would swing them. - -The crew now gathered on deck. One of them, Kelly, had been dazed by -an exploding shell. When he had picked himself up he started down -the engine-room hatch, but found the water rising. Then he remembered -the _Merrimac's_ purpose, and tried to reach the torpedo of which he -had charge. The torpedo was useless, and he headed back to the deck, -climbing up on all fours. It was a strange sight to see him stealing up, -and Hobson and some of the others drew their revolvers, thinking for the -moment that he must be an enemy who had boarded the ship. Fortunately -they recognized him almost immediately. - -The tide was bearing them to the center of the channel when there came -a blasting noise and shock. A mine had exploded beneath them. "Lads, -they're helping us!" cried the commander. But the mine did not break the -deck, and the ship only settled a little lower. For a moment it seemed -as if the coal might have closed the breach made by the explosion, but -just as the crew feared that they were to be carried past the point -chosen for sinking the current from the opposite shore caught them, -and the _Merrimac_ settled crosswise. It was now only a matter of time -before she would sink in the harbor. - -The crew could now turn their attention to themselves. Hobson said to -them, "We will remain here, lads, till the moon sets. When it is dark -we will go down the after-hatch, to the coal, where her stern will -be left out of water. We will remain inside all day, and to-night at -ebb-tide try to make our way to the squadron. If the enemy comes on -board, we will remain quiet until he finds us, and will repel him. If -he then turns artillery on the place where we are, we will swim out -to points farther forward." He started toward the bow to reconnoiter, -but was persuaded not to expose himself to the enemy's fire. One of -the men discovered a break in the bulwarks that gave a good view, and -Hobson stood there. The moon was bright, though now low, and the muzzles -of the Spanish guns were very near them. The crew, however, remained -safely hidden behind the rail. From all sides came the firing, and -the Americans, lying full length on the _Merrimac's_ deck, felt the -continual shock of projectiles striking around them. Some of the crew -suggested that they should take to the small boat, but the commander -knew that this would be certain destruction, and ordered them to remain. -Presently a shot struck the boiler, and a rush of steam came up the deck -near where they lay. A canteen was passed from hand to hand. Hobson, -having no pockets, carried some tourniquets around his left arm, and a -roll of antiseptic lint in his left hand, ready in case any of his crew -were wounded. - -Looking through the hole in the bulwarks the commander saw that the -_Merrimac_ was again moving. Sunk deep though she was, the tide was -carrying her on, and might bear her some distance. There seemed to be -no way in which they could make her sink where she was. Two more mines -exploded, but missed the ship, and as she floated on it became evident -that they could not block the channel completely. But shortly the -_Merrimac_ gave a lurch forward and settled to the port side. Now the -Spanish _Reina Mercedes_ was near at hand, and the _Pluton_ was coming -close inboard, but their guns and torpedoes did not hasten the sinking -of the collier. She plunged again and settled in the channel. - -A rush of water came up the gangway, and the crew were thrown against -the bulwarks, and then into the sea. The life-preservers helped to -keep them afloat, but when they looked for the life-boat they found -that it had been carried away. A catamaran was the largest piece of -floating wreckage, and they swam to this. The firing had now stopped. -The wreckage began to drift away, and the crew were left swimming about -the catamaran, apparently unseen by the enemy. The men were ordered to -cling to this rude craft, their bodies in the water, their heads hidden -by the boards, and to keep quiet, as Spanish boats were passing close -to them. All the crew were safe, and Hobson expected that in time some -Spanish officers would come out to reconnoiter the channel. He knew that -his men could not swim against the tide to the harbor entrance, and even -had they been able to do so it would have been too dangerous a risk, as -the banks were now lined with soldiers, and the water patrolled by small -boats. Their hope lay in surrendering before they were fired upon. - -The moon had now nearly set, and the shadow of the high banks fell -across the water. Boats rowed by Spanish sailors pulled close to the -catamaran; but acting under orders from their commander the crew of the -_Merrimac_ kept well out of sight. The sun rose, and a new day came. -Soon the crew could see the line of distant mountains, and the steep -slopes leading to Morro Castle. A Spanish torpedo-destroyer was heading -up the harbor, and a bugle at one of the batteries could be heard across -the waters. Still the Americans clung to the catamaran, although their -teeth were chattering, and they had to work their arms and legs to keep -warm. - -[Illustration: SPANISH BOATS PULLED CLOSE TO THEM] - -Presently one of the men said, "A steam-launch is heading for us, sir!" -The commander looked about, and saw a large launch, the curtains aft -drawn down, coming from around a point of land straight toward the -catamaran. As it drew near the launch swerved to the left. When it was -about thirty yards away Hobson hailed it. The boat instantly stopped -and began to back, while some riflemen appeared on the deck and took -position for firing. No shot followed, however. Hobson called out -again, asking whether there were any officers on the boat, and adding -that if there were he was ready to surrender himself and his American -sailors as prisoners of war. The curtain at the stern was lowered, a -Spanish officer gave an order, and the rifles dropped. The American -commander swam to the launch, and climbed on board, being helped up by -the Spanish officer, who turned out later to be no other than Admiral -Cervera himself. Hobson surrendered for himself and his crew. The launch -then drew close to the catamaran, and the sailors clinging to it -were pulled on board. Although the Spaniards knew that the _Merrimac's_ -men had bottled up their war-ships in the harbor, they could not help -praising their bravery. - -The Spanish launch took them to the _Reina Mercedes_. There the men were -given dry clothes and food. Although all were scratched and bruised only -one was wounded, and his wound, though painful, was not serious. The -American officer was invited to join the Spaniards at breakfast, and -was treated with as much courtesy as if he had been an honored guest. -Afterward Hobson wrote a note to Admiral Sampson, who was in command -of the American fleet. The note read: "Sir: I have the honor to report -that the _Merrimac_ is sunk in the channel. No loss, only bruises. We -are prisoners of war, being well cared for." He asked that this should -be sent under a flag of truce. Later in the day the Americans were -taken from the war-ship in a launch, and carried across the harbor to -Morro Castle. This course brought them within a short distance of where -the _Merrimac_ had sunk, and as Hobson noted the position he concluded -that the plan had only partly succeeded, and that the channel was not -completely blocked. - -Landing at a small wharf the Americans were marched up a steep hill that -led to the Morro from the rear. The fortress stood out like one of the -mediæval castles of Europe, commanding a wide view of sea and shore. -The road brought them to the bridge that crossed the moat. They marched -under the portcullis, and entered a vaulted passage. The American -officer was shown into the guard-room, while the crew were led on. A -few minutes later Admiral Cervera came into the guard-room, and held -out his hand to Hobson. The admiral said that he would have liked to -send the American's note under a flag of truce to his fleet, but that -this had been refused by the general in command. He added, however, that -some word should be sent to inform their friends of the safe escape of -the _Merrimac's_ men. Hobson was then led to a cell in the tower of -the castle. As the jailer stopped to unlock the door Hobson had a view -of the sea, and made out the line of the American battle-ships moving -in two columns. He was told to enter the cell, which was a bare and -ill-looking place, but a few minutes later a Spanish captain arrived -with apologies, saying that he hoped soon to provide the Americans with -better quarters. - -A little later furniture was brought to the cell, and food, cigars, -cigarettes, and a bottle of brandy provided for the American officer. In -fact he and his men fared as well as the Spanish officers and soldiers -themselves. The governor of the fortress sent a note to ask what he -could do to improve Hobson's comfort. Officers of all ranks called to -shake hands with him, and express their admiration for his courage. -That first night in the castle, after the sentries had made their -rounds, Hobson climbed up on his cot-bed and looked through a small -window at the top of the cell. The full moon showed a steep slope from -the fortress to the water, then the wide sweep of the harbor, with a -picket-boat on duty as it had been the night before, and beyond the -boat the great Spanish war-ships, and still farther off the batteries -of Socapa. It was hard to believe that only twenty-four hours before -the center of that quiet moonlit water had been ablaze with fire aimed -at the small collier Hobson had commanded. As he studied the situation -he decided that the _Merrimac_ probably blocked the channel. The enemy -would hesitate a long time before they would try to take their fleet -past the sunken vessel, and that delay would give Admiral Sampson time -to gather his ships. Even if the channel were not entirely blocked -the Spanish ships could only leave the harbor in single line and with -the most skilful steering. Therefore he concluded that his perilous -expedition had been successful. - -Next morning a Spanish officer brought him news that a flag of truce had -been carried to Admiral Sampson with word of the crew's escape, and that -the messengers had been given a box for Hobson, and bags of clothes, -some money, and other articles for him and his crew. The men now dressed -again in the uniform of American marines, were treated as prisoners of -war, and lived almost as comfortably as their captors. - -While Hobson was having his coffee on the morning of June 6th, he heard -the whiz and crash of an exploding shell, then another, and another, and -knew that a general bombardment of the fortress had begun. He hastily -examined the cell to see what protection it would offer from bricks and -mortar falling from the walls and roof. At the first shot the sentry on -guard had bolted the door and left. The American pulled the table and -wash-stand in front of the door, and stood the galvanized iron box that -had been sent him against the end of the table; this he thought would -catch splinters and stones which would probably be more dangerous than -actual shells. He lay down under the protection of this cover. He knew -that the gunners of the American fleet were good shots, and figured that -they could easily demolish all that part of the Morro in which his cell -was situated. One shell after another against the walls of the fortress -made the whole structure tremble, and it seemed as if part of the walls -would be blown away. Fortunately, however, the firing soon turned in -another direction, and Hobson could come from his shelter, and, standing -on his cot-bed, look through the window at the battle. Several times -he took shelter again under the table, and several times returned to -watch the cannonade. The shells screamed through the air; plowed through -shrubs and earthworks; knocked bricks and mortar from the Morro, and set -fire to some of the Spanish ships. But no serious damage was done, and -the bombardment ended in a stand-off between the two sides. - -The American officer had no desire to pass through such a cannonade -again, and he wrote to the Spanish governor to ask that his crew and -himself be transferred to safer quarters. Next day an officer arrived -with orders to take all the prisoners to the city of Santiago. So -after a four days' stay in Morro Castle the little party set out on an -inland march, guarded by some thirty Spanish soldiers. It was not far -to Santiago, and there the Americans were housed in the regular army -barracks. These quarters were much better than those in the fortress, -and the British Consul secured many comforts and delicacies for the -Americans. - -The men of the _Merrimac_ stayed in Santiago during the siege of that -city. On July 5th arrangements were made to exchange Hobson and his -men. In the afternoon they were blindfolded and guided out of the city. -Half a mile or more beyond the entrenchments they were told that they -might remove the handkerchiefs, and found themselves facing their own -troops on a distant ridge. Soon they were being welcomed by their own -men, who told them of the recent victories won by fleet and army. Not -long afterward they reached their ships, and were received on board the -_New York_ by the officers and men who had watched them set out on their -dangerous mission on that moonlight night of June 3d. They gave a royal -welcome to the small crew who had brought the collier into the very -heart of the Spanish lines and sunk her, taking their chances of escape. -They were the heroes of a desperate adventure, from which every man -returned unharmed. - - - * * * * * - - -Transcriber's Notes: - - -Simple typographical errors were corrected. - -Punctuation and spelling were made consistent when a predominant -preference was found in this book; otherwise they were not changed. - -Accent marks on Japanese words have not been changed. - -[=o] represents the letter "o" with macron accent mark. [)u] represents -the letter "u" with breve accent mark. - - - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's Historic Adventures, by Rupert S. Holland - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORIC ADVENTURES *** - -***** This file should be named 42398-8.txt or 42398-8.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/4/2/3/9/42398/ - -Produced by Greg Bergquist, Charlie Howard, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This -file was produced from images generously made available -by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.) - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions -will be renamed. - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no -one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation -(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without -permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, -set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to -copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to -protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project -Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you -charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you -do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the -rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose -such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and -research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do -practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is -subject to the trademark license, especially commercial -redistribution. - - - -*** START: FULL LICENSE *** - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at - www.gutenberg.org/license. - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy -all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. -If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" -or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the -collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from -copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative -works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg -are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project -Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by -freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of -this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with -the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by -keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project -Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate -access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently -whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, -copied or distributed: - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with -almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or -re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included -with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived -from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is -posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied -and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees -or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work -with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the -work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 -through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional -terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked -to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the -permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), -you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a -copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon -request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other -form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided -that - -- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is - owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he - has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the - Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments - must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you - prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax - returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and - sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the - address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to - the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." - -- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or - destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium - and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of - Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any - money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days - of receipt of the work. - -- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set -forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from -both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm -collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain -"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or -corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual -property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a -computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by -your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. -To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 -and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent -permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. -Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 -North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email -contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the -Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To -SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any -particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. -To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic -works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. -unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily -keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |